Pioneer 6289628 Pdp 5010fd Svm

PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-chome, PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. Box 1760, LonPIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, 9120PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 A

PIONEER CORPORATION 2007

PDP-5010FD

Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japang Beach, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. Melsele, Belgiumlexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936

ORDER NO.

ARP3455

PLASMA DISPLAY SYSTEM

PDP-5010FDTHIS MANUAL IS APPLICABLE TO THE FOLLOWING MODEL(S) AND TYPE(S).

Model Type Power Requirement Remarks

PDP-5010FD KUCXC AC 120 V

PDP-5010FD KUC AC 120 V

For details, refer to "Important Check Points for good servicing".

T-IZS-001 JULY 2007 Printed in Japan

C

D

F

A

B

E

1 2 3 4

SAFETY INFORMATION

This service manual is intended for qualified service technicians ; it is not meant for the casual do-it-yourselfer. Qualified technicians have the necessary test equipment and tools, and have been trained to properly and safely repair complex products such as those covered by this manual.Improperly performed repairs can adversely affect the safety and reliability of the product and may void the warranty. If you are not qualified to perform the repair of this product properly and safely, you should not risk trying to do so and refer the repair to a qualified service technician.

WARNINGThis product contains lead in solder and certain electrical parts contain chemicals which are known to the state of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Health & Safety Code Section 25249.6 - Proposition 65

NOTICE(FOR CANADIAN MODEL ONLY)Fuse symbols (fast operating fuse) and/or (slow operating fuse) on PCB indicate that replacement parts must be of identical designation.

REMARQUE(POUR MODÈLE CANADIEN SEULEMENT)Les symboles de fusible (fusible de type rapide) et/ou (fusible de type lent) sur CCI indiquent que les pièces de remplacement doivent avoir la même désignation.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONSNOTICE : Comply with all cautions and safety related notes located on or inside the cabinet and on the chassis. The following precautions should be observed :1. When service is required, even though the PDP UNIT an isolation transformer should be inserted between the power line and the set in safety before any service is performed.2. When replacing a chassis in the set, all the protective devices must be put back in place, such as barriers, nonmetallic knobs, adjustment and compartment covershields, isolation resistor- capacitor, etc.3. When service is required, observe the original lead dress. Extra precaution should be taken to assure correct lead dress in the high voltage circuitry area.4. Always use the manufacture's replacement components. Especially critical components as indicated on the circuit diagram should not be replaced by other manufacture's. Furthermore where a short circuit has occurred, replace those components that indicate evidence of overheating.5. Before returning a serviced set to the customer, the service technician must thoroughly test the unit to be certain that it is completely safe to operate without danger of electrical shock, and be sure that no protective device built into the set by the manufacture has become defective, or inadvertently defeated during servicing. Therefore, the following checks should be performed for the continued protection of the customer and servicetechnician.

6. Perform the following precautions against unwanted radiation and rise in internal temperature. • Always return the internal wiring to the original styling. • Attach parts (Gascket, Ferrite Core, Ground, Rear Cover, Shield Case etc.) surely after disassembly.7. Perform the following precautions for the PDP panel. • When the front case is removed, make sure nothing hits the panel face, panel corner, and panel edge (so that the glass does not break). • Make sure that the panel vent does not break. (Check that the cover is attached.) • Handle the FPC connected to the panel carefully. Twisting or pulling the FPC when connecting it to the connector will cause it to peel off from the panel.8. Pay attention to the following. • Pay extreme caution when the front case and rear panel are removed because this may cause a high risk of disturbance to TVs and radios in the surrounding.

PDP-5010FD21 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

3

5 6 7 8

Leakage Current Cold CheckWith the AC plug removed from an AC power source, place a jumper across the two plug prongs. Turn the AC power switch on. Using an insulation tester (DC 500V), connect one lead to the jumpered AC plug and touch the other lead to each exposed metal part (input/output terminals, screwheads, metal overlays, control shafts, etc.), particularly any exposed metal part having a return path to the chassis. Exposed metal parts having a return path to the chassis should have a minimum resistor reading of 4 MΩ.The below 4 MΩ resistor value indicate an abnormality which require corrective action. Exposed metal parts not having a return path to the chassis will indicate an open circuit.

Leakage Current Hot CheckPlug the AC line cord directly into an AC power source (do not use an isolation transformer for this check). Turn the AC power switch on.U s i n g a " L e a k a g e C u r r e n t Te s t e r ( S i m p s o n M o d e l 2 2 9 equivalent)", measure for current from all exposed metal parts of the cabinet (input/output terminals, screwheads, metal overlays, control shaft, etc.), particularly any exposed metal part having a return path to the chassis, to a known earth ground (water pipe, conduit, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 1 mA.

A N Y M E A S U R E M E N T S N OT W I T H I N T H E L I M I T S OUTLINED ABOVE ARE INDICATIVE OF A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD AND MUST BE CORRECTED BEFORE RETURNING THE SET TO THE CUSTOMER.

PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICEMany electrical and mechanical parts in PIONEER set have special safety related characteristics. These are often not evident from visual inspection nor the protection afforded by them necessarily can be obtained by using replacement components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which have these special safety characteristics are identified in this Service Manual.Electrical components having such features are identified by marking with a > on the schematics and on the parts list in this Service Manual.The use of a substitute replacement component which dose not h a v e t h e s a m e s a f e t y c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s a s t h e P I O N E E R recommended replacement one, shown in the parts list in this Service Manual, may create shock, fire or other hazards.Product Safety is continuously under review and new instructions are issued from time to time. For the latest information, always consult the current PIONEER Service Manual. A subscription to, or additional copies of, PIONEER Service Manual may be obtained at a nominal charge from PIONEER.

Leakagecurrenttester

Reading shouldnot be above1 mADevice

undertest

Test allexposed metalsurfaces

Also test withplug reversed(Using AC adapterplug as required)

Earthground

AC Leakage Test

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD4

1 2 3 4

[Important Check Points for Good Servicing]In this manual, procedures that must be performed during repairs are marked with the below symbol.Please be sure to confirm and follow these procedures.

1. Product safety

Please conform to product regulations (such as safety and radiation regulations), and maintain a safe servicing environment by following the safety instructions described in this manual.

1 Use specified parts for repair.

Use genuine parts. Be sure to use important parts for safety.

2 Do not perform modifications without proper instructions.

Please follow the specified safety methods when modification(addition/change of parts) is required due to interferences such as radio/TV interference and foreign noise.

3 Make sure the soldering of repaired locations is properly performed.

When you solder while repairing, please be sure that there are no cold solder and other debris.Soldering should be finished with the proper quantity. (Refer to the example)

4 Make sure the screws are tightly fastened.

Please be sure that all screws are fastened, and that there are no loose screws.

5 Make sure each connectors are correctly inserted.

Please be sure that all connectors are inserted, and that there are no imperfect insertion.

6 Make sure the wiring cables are set to their original state.

Please replace the wiring and cables to the original state after repairs.In addition, be sure that there are no pinched wires, etc.

7 Make sure screws and soldering scraps do not remain inside the product.

Please check that neither solder debris nor screws remain inside the product.

8 There should be no semi-broken wires, scratches, melting, etc. on the coating of the power cord.

Damaged power cords may lead to fire accidents, so please be sure that there are no damages.If you find a damaged power cord, please exchange it with a suitable one.

9 There should be no spark traces or similar marks on the power plug.

When spark traces or similar marks are found on the power supply plug, please check the connection and advise on secure connections and suitable usage. Please exchange the power cord if necessary.

a Safe environment should be secured during servicing.

When you perform repairs, please pay attention to static electricity, furniture, household articles, etc. in order to prevent injuries. Please pay attention to your surroundings and repair safely.

2. Adjustments

To keep the original performance of the products, optimum adjustments and confirmation of characteristics within specification.Adjustments should be performed in accordance with the procedures/instructions described in this manual.

4. Cleaning

For parts that require cleaning, such as optical pickups, tape deck heads, lenses and mirrors used in projection monitors, proper cleaning should be performed to restore their performances.

3. Lubricants, Glues, and Replacement parts

Use grease and adhesives that are equal to the specified substance. Make sure the proper amount is applied.

5. Shipping mode and Shipping screws

To protect products from damages or failures during transit, the shipping mode should be set or the shipping screws should be installed before shipment. Please be sure to follow this method especially if it is specified in this manual.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

5

5 6 7 8

CONTENTS SAFETY INFORMATION ......................................................................................................................................................... 21. SERVICE PRECAUTIONS.................................................................................................................................................... 7

1.1 NOTES ON SOLDERING............................................................................................................................................... 71.2 CHARGED SECTION AND HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING POINT............................................................................. 8

2. SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................................................................. 92.1 ACCESSORIES.............................................................................................................................................................. 92.2 SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................................ 102.3 PANEL FACILITIES....................................................................................................................................................... 11

3. BASIC ITEMS FOR SERVICE ............................................................................................................................................ 143.1 CHECK POINTS AFTER SERVICING ......................................................................................................................... 143.2 QUICK REFERENCE ................................................................................................................................................... 153.3 PCB LOCATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 173.4 JIGS LIST ..................................................................................................................................................................... 183.5 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................................................... 18

4. BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................................................................................................................. 204.1 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)............................................................................................................................. 204.2 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)............................................................................................................................. 224.3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) .............................................................................................................................. 244.4 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) .............................................................................................................................. 264.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................................................................ 284.6 50F X DRIVE ASSY...................................................................................................................................................... 294.7 50F Y DRIVE, 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS......................................................................................................... 304.8 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of 50F X, Y DRIVE and 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS ................................................ 314.9 50F ADDRESS L and S ASSYS................................................................................................................................... 324.10 50F DIGITAL ASSY .................................................................................................................................................... 334.11 MAIN ASSY (DTV BLOCK DIAGRAM)....................................................................................................................... 344.12 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of MAIN ASSY.................................................................................................................. 364.13 TANSHI ASSY ............................................................................................................................................................ 384.14 50FHD LED and FHD IR ASSYS ............................................................................................................................... 394.15 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of FHD RLS and SIDE KEY ASSYS ................................................................................ 40

5. DIAGNOSIS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 415.1 POWER SUPPLY OPERATION.................................................................................................................................... 41

5.1.1 LED DISPLAY INFORMATION............................................................................................................................... 415.1.2 POWER ON SEQUENCE ...................................................................................................................................... 425.1.3 DETAILS OF POWER ON SEQUENCE................................................................................................................. 43

5.2 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART OF FAILURE ANALYSIS .................................................................................................. 455.2.1 WHOLE UNIT......................................................................................................................................................... 455.2.2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT.......................................................................................................................................... 475.2.3 DRIVE ASSY.......................................................................................................................................................... 485.2.4 DIGITAL ASSY ....................................................................................................................................................... 525.2.5 MAIN ASSY............................................................................................................................................................ 535.2.6 VIDEO SYSTEM .................................................................................................................................................... 545.2.7 AUDIO SYSTEM .................................................................................................................................................... 60

5.3 DIAGNOSIS OF PD (POWER-DOWN) ........................................................................................................................ 635.3.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER-DOWN SIGNAL .......................................................................................... 635.3.2 PD (POWER-DOWN) DIAGNOSIS OF FAILURE ANALYSIS ................................................................................ 64

5.4 DIAGNOSIS OF SD (SHUTDOWN) ............................................................................................................................. 675.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE SHUTDOWN SIGNAL............................................................................................... 675.4.2 SD (SHUTDOWN) DIAGNOSIS ............................................................................................................................. 68

5.5 NON-FAILURE INFORMATION.................................................................................................................................... 705.5.1 INFORMATION ON SYMPTOMS THAT DO NOT CONSTITUTE FAILURE .......................................................... 705.5.2 FUNCTION OF DECREASING THE BRIGHTNESS LEVEL ................................................................................. 73

5.6 OUTLINE OF THE OPERATION .................................................................................................................................. 745.6.1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF FUNCTION ..................................................................................................... 745.6.2 SPECIFICATION OF THE FAN CONTROL............................................................................................................ 755.6.3 PROCESSING IN ABNORMALITY ........................................................................................................................ 765.6.4 TRAP SWITCH....................................................................................................................................................... 79

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD6

1 2 3 4

6. SERVICE FACTORY MODE................................................................................................................................................806.1 OUTLINE OF THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE ..........................................................................................................80

6.1.1 SERVICE FACTORY MODE TRANSITION CHART...............................................................................................806.1.2 HOW TO ENTER/EXIT SERVICE FACTORY MODE .............................................................................................806.1.3 FUNCTIONS WHEN ENTERING THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE .....................................................................816.1.4 REMOTE CONTROL CODE IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE ................................................................................826.1.5 PDP SERVICE REMOTE CONTROL.....................................................................................................................836.1.6 FACTORY HIERARCHICAL TABLE .......................................................................................................................846.1.7 INDICATIONS IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE ......................................................................................................86

6.2 DETAILS OF FACTORY MENU ....................................................................................................................................886.2.1 INFORMATION.......................................................................................................................................................886.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+) .............................................................................................................................................986.2.3 OPTION................................................................................................................................................................1086.2.4 INITIALIZE............................................................................................................................................................109

7. DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................................................................................1127.1 FLOWCHART OF REMOVAL ORDER FOR THE MAIN PARTS AND BOARDS .......................................................1127.2 DISASSEMBLY ...........................................................................................................................................................1137.3 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM.....................................................121

8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT ..............................................................................................................................1228.1 ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED WHEN THE UNIT IS REPAIRED OR REPLACED ........................................................1228.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY) ...........................................................................................................1248.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA ..............................................................................................................................1278.4 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL ASSY IS REPLACED .......................................................................1288.5 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED ..................................................................................1418.6 PRECAUTION ON REPLACEMENT OF THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT......................................................................144

9. RS-232C............................................................................................................................................................................1459.1 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND...........................................................................................................................145

9.1.1 PREPARED TOOLS .............................................................................................................................................1459.1.2 USING RS-232C COMMANDS ............................................................................................................................145

9.2 LIST OF RS-232C COMMANDS ................................................................................................................................1469.3 DETAILS OF EACH COMMANDS ..............................................................................................................................155

9.3.1 QS1 (PANEL STATUS) .........................................................................................................................................1559.3.2 QS2 (PANEL OPERATION DATA) ........................................................................................................................1569.3.3 QS3 (OTHER DATA ON THE PANEL) ..................................................................................................................1579.3.4 QAJ (PANEL ADJUSTMENT DATA) .....................................................................................................................1589.3.5 QPW (VIDEO ADJUSTMENT DATA OF THE PANEL) .........................................................................................1599.3.6 QPM (PULSE METER VALUE) ............................................................................................................................1599.3.7 QPD (PD LOGS) ..................................................................................................................................................1609.3.8 QSD (SD LOGS) ..................................................................................................................................................1619.3.9 QSE (DESTINATION PECULIAR INFORMATION) ..............................................................................................1629.3.10 QMT (TEMPERATURE / FAN ROTATION / ROOM LIGHT SENSOR) ...............................................................1629.3.11 QNG (SHUTDOWN INFORMATION OF MTB)...................................................................................................1639.3.12 QSI (INPUT SIGNAL DATA)................................................................................................................................1659.3.13 DRV (PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF) ..........................................................................................................1659.3.14 FAY / FAN (ADJ. COMMANDS PERMISSION / PROHIBITION) ........................................................................1669.3.15 FAJ / UAJ / CBU / BCP (BACKUP FUNCTION FOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE) ...................................................166

10. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST...........................................................................................................................16810.1 PACKING SECTION .................................................................................................................................................16810.2 REAR SECTION .......................................................................................................................................................17010.3 FRONT SECTION.....................................................................................................................................................17210.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2) .........................................................................................................................................17410.5 CHASSIS SECTION (2/2) .........................................................................................................................................17610.6 PANEL CHASSIS SECTION.....................................................................................................................................17810.7 MULTI BASE SECTION ............................................................................................................................................18010.8 PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F (AWU1272)...................................................................................................................18210.9 TABLE TOP STAND ..................................................................................................................................................18410.10 SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING) ............................................................................................................................18510.11 CS ASSY ................................................................................................................................................................186

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

7

5 6 7 8

1. SERVICE PRECAUTIONS1.1 NOTES ON SOLDERING

• For environmental protection, lead-free solder is used on the printed circuit boards mounted in this unit. Be sure to use lead-free solder and a soldering iron that can meet specifications for use with lead-free solders for repairs accompanied by reworking of soldering.

• Compared with conventional eutectic solders, lead-free solders have higher melting points, by approximately 40 °C. Therefore, for lead-free soldering, the tip temperature of a soldering iron must be set to around 373 °C in general, although the temperature depends on the heat capacity of the PC board on which reworking is required and the weight of the tip of the soldering iron.

Compared with eutectic solders, lead-free solders have higher bond strengths but slower wetting times and higher melting temperatures (hard to melt/easy to harden).

The following lead-free solders are available as service parts:• Parts numbers of lead-free solder: GYP1006 1.0 in dia. GYP1007 0.6 in dia. GYP1008 0.3 in dia.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD8

1 2 3 4

1.2 CHARGED SECTION AND HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING POINT

Fig. High Voltage Generating Point (Rear view)

The places where voltage is 100 V or more except for the charged places described above. If the places are touched, there is a risk of electric shock.The VSUS voltage remains for several minutes after the power to the unit is turned off. These places must not be touched until about 10 minutes after the power is turned off, or it is confirmed with a tester that there is no residual VSUS voltage.

If the procedures described in “5.6.1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON/OFF FUNCTION” are performed before the power is turned off, the voltage will be discharged in about 30 seconds.

POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................... (205 V)50F X DRIVE Assy .......................................................... (205 V)50F Y DRIVE Assy ......................................... (−270 V to 400 V)50F SCAN A Assy .......................................... (−270 V to 400 V)50F SCAN B Assy ........................................... (−270 V to 400 V)50F SCAN C Assy ........................................... (−270 V to 400 V)50F SCAN D Assy ........................................... (−270 V to 400 V)

: Part is the High Voltage Generating Points other than the Charged Section.

High Voltage Generating Point

50F Y DRIVE Assy POWER SUPPLY Unit 50F X DRIVE Assy Conductive plate X

50F

SC

AN

DA

ssy

50F

SC

AN

CA

ssy

50F

SC

AN

BA

ssy

50F

SC

AN

AA

ssy

Charged SectionThe places where the commercial AC power is used without passing through the power supply transformer.If the places are touched, there is a risk of electric shock. In addition, the measuring equipment can be damaged if i t is connected to the GND of the charged section and the GND of the non-charged section while connecting the set directly to the commercial AC power supply. Therefore, be sure to connect the set via an insulated transformer and supply the current.

1. Power Cord2. AC Inlet3. Power Switch4. Fuse (In the POWER SUPPLY Unit)5. STB Transformer and Converter Transformer (In the POWER SUPPLY Unit)6. Other primary side of the POWER SUPPLY Unit

AC inlet Power switch

: Part is Charged Section.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

9

5 6 7 8

2. SPECIFICATIONS2.1 ACCESSORIES

Remote control unit(AXD1550)

Band assy(AXY1192)

Speaker cable: ×2(SDS1202)

Brackets for side: ×2

Brackets for center

Bracket Assy (S): ×2(SXG1127)

Bracket Assy (C)(SXG1128)

Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm: Black): ×9(BMZ50P100FTB)

Power cord (2 m/6.6 feet)(ADG1215)

Alkaline dry cell battery (LR6, AA)

Binder Assy(AEC1908)

Cleaning cloth (AED1285)

Warranty card

Operating instructions (PDP-5010FD/KUCXC) (ARE1472)

Operating instructions (PDP-5010FD/KUC) (ARE1487)

Speed clamp: ×3

Screw: ×2(M4×10 mm)(for plastic bands)

Plastic band: ×2

Bead band: ×3

Speaker accessories

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD10

1 2 3 4

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions

Item

Audio Amplifier

Speakers

Sound Effect

120 V AC, 60 Hz, 442 W (26 W Standby)

Circuit type

Audio format Dolby Digital

Circuit type

Audio multiplex

ANT/CABLE A IN

ANT B IN

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT 4

PC INPUT

INPUT 5

INPUT 6

INPUT 7

Optical

SPEAKERS

CableCARD

Side INPUT 3

PHONES 16 Ω to 32 Ω recommended

USB USB in**

On-screen display languages

Number of pixel

17 W + 17 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 6 Ω)

Woofer: 4.8 cm x 13 cm cone type Tweeter: 2.5 cm semidome type

SRS FOCUS/SRS/SRS TruBass

Power Requirement

Weight Main unit: 38.5 kg (84.9 lbs.)Stand: 2.2 kg (4.9 lbs.) (including bolts)Speaker system: 3.3 kg (7.3 lbs.) (including cables, mounting fittings and screws)Total: 44.0 kg (97 lbs.)

Reception System (Digital)

8VSB/64QAM/256QAM/QPSK demodulation

ATSC Digital TV system

VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69

CATV Ch. 2 to 135

Reception System (Analog) American TV standard NTSC system

Video signal detection PLL full synchronous detection, PLL digital Synthesizer system

VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69

VHF/UHFTuner

CATV

VHF/UHFTuner

BTSC system

Terminals Rear 75 Ω UNBAL, F Type for DTV/VHF/UHF/CATV in

ANT/CABLE A IN Ch. 1 to 135 ANT B IN Ch. 1 to 125

75 Ω UNBAL, F Type for VHF/UHF/CATV in

S-VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in

COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in

HDMI in*, AUDIO in

HDMI in*, AUDIO in

HDMI in*

HDMI in*

Analog RGB in, AUDIO in

AUDIO OUT AUDIO out (Fixed)

DIGITAL OUT

CONTROL OUT 1

6 Ω to 16 Ω

SUB WOOFER Variable

Point of Deployment

COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in

English/French/Spanish

* This conforms to HDMI1.3 and HDCP1.1. HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a digital interface that handles both video and audio using a single cable. HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a technology used to protect copyrighted digital contents that use the Digital Visual Interface (DVI).** This conforms to USB 1.1 and 2.0 .• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Unit: mm (inch)

1232 (48-1/2) 120 (4-23/32)

80 (3

-5/3

2)

550 (21-21/32)

850

(33-

15/3

2)

300 (11-13/16)

722

(28-

7/16

)

1920 × 1080 pixels

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

11

5 6 7 8

2.3 PANEL FACILITIES

Front Section

ON STANDBY SLEEP

5

Side Side

6

432

1

7

9

10

11

813

12

15

14

16

11 button (This button is located on the bottom on the rear panel (see on Rear section). If the button is off, the power will not turn on even when TV on the remote control unit or STANDBY/ON on the plasma display is pressed. To turn on the power, press ).2 POWER ON indicator3 STANDBY indicator4 SLEEP indicator5 Room Light Sensor6 Remote control sensor7 STANDBY/ON button1

8 INPUT button (ENTER button*)9 VOLUME UP/DOWN buttons (UP/DOWN buttons*)10 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons (LEFT/RIGHT buttons*)11 TV GUIDE button*12 USB port13 PHONES output terminal14 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, PB, PR)15 INPUT 3 terminal (VIDEO)16 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO)

The buttons with asterisks (*) can operate the TV Guide On Screen™ system.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD12

1 2 3 4

Rear Section

4 5

4 5

4 5

6

2 3 4

7 85 12119 10

21

23

22

18

1413

15

1617

19 20

25 24

26 27 1

* For exact terminal positions, refer to the terminal position sheet located near the terminal compartment.

1 button2 CableCARD™ slot3 ANT/CABLE A IN terminal4 AC IN terminal5 INPUT 4 terminal (HDMI)6 INPUT 5 terminal (HDMI)7 INPUT 6 terminal (HDMI)8 INPUT 7 terminal (HDMI)9 PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB)10 CONTROL OUT terminal11 RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup)12 ANT B IN terminal13 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO)14 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO)15 SUB WOOFER terminal16 AUDIO OUT terminals (AUDIO)

17 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO)18 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO)19 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO)20 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO)21 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO)22 DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL)23 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO)24 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, PB, PPR)25 SPEAKERS (R/L) terminals26 SPEAKERS (R) terminal (Speaker side)27 SPEAKERS (L) terminal (Speaker side)

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

13

5 6 7 8

Remote Control Unit

Note

1

10

11

13

12

14

22

23

24

5

34

18

19

2021

7

8

9

15

17

16

2625

28

27

30

29

2

6

Mode switch(with “TV” selected)

This section describes the functions of the buttons available when the mode switch has been set to TV.

• When using the remote control unit, point it at the plasma display.

1 TV : Turns on the power to the plasma display or places it into standby mode.2 Transmission confirmation LED 3 INPUT: Selects an input source of the plasma display. (“INPUT1”, “INPUT 2 ”, “INPUT3”, “INPUT4”, “INPUT5”, “INPUT6” and “INPUT 7 ”)4 SCREEN SIZE: Selects the screen size.5 AV SELECTION: Selects audio and video settings. (AV source: OPTIMUM, STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, USER. PC source: STANDARD, USER.)6 INFO: Displays a channel banner when a TV program is being watched. When the TV Guide On Screen™ system is in operation, displays information about the currently highlighted channel (if available).7 HOME MENU: Displays the HOME MENU screen. MENU: Displays a panel menu when the TV Guide On Screen™ system is in operation.8 DAY +/–: Jumps to the next or previous day of program listings in the TV Guide On Screen™ Listing service.9 / / / : Selects a desired item on the menu screen.10 HDMI CONTROL: Displays the HDMI Control menu.11 FAVORITE CH (A, B, C, D): Selects any of the four preset channels. While watching, you can toggle the set channels by pressing A, B, C and D.12 0 to 9: Selects the channel.13 • (dot): Enters a dot.14 CH +/–: Selects the channel.15 SPLIT: Switches the screen mode among 2-screen, picture-in- picture, and single-screen.16 FREEZE: Freezes a frame from a moving image. Press again to cancel the function.17 MTS: Selects MTS/SAP or language depending on the program being watched.18 ANT: Selects the antenna (A, B).19 PC: Selects the PC terminal as an input source.20 DISPLAY: Displays the channel information.21 TV GUIDE: Displays the TV Guide On Screen™ system.22 ENTER: Executes a command.23 PAGE +/– (for the TV Guide On Screen™ system): Scrolls the program listing screen vertically.24 RETURN: Returns to the previous menu screen.25 CH ENTER: Executes a channel number.26 CH RETURN: Returns to the previous channel. This button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen™ system is displayed.27 VOL +/–: Sets the volume.28 MUTING: Mutes the sound.29 SHIFT: Moves the location of the small screen when in the picture-in-picture mode.30 SWAP: Switches between the two screens when in the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode.Luminous remote control buttons All buttons on the remote control unit are luminous and gather and store light. This enables quick access to the desired function when performing operations in dark places.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD14

1 2 3 4

3. BASIC ITEMS FOR SERVICE3.1 CHECK POINTS AFTER SERVICING

Items to be checked after repair (PDP)To ensure the quality of the product after repair, check the recommended items shown below:

See the table below for the items to be checked regarding video and audio:

Item to be checked regarding video Item to be checked regarding audio

Block noise Distortion

Horizontal noise Noise

Dot noise Volume too low

Disturbed image (video jumpiness) Volume too high

Too dark Volume fluctuating

Too bright Sound interrupted

Mottled color

No. Procedures Item to be checked

1Check if all the symptoms pointed out by the customer have been addressed.

The symptoms in question must not be reproduced.

2 Connect the peripheral equipment.Connect all external peripheral equipment as originally connected and check if the connections are correct.

3 Check the video and audio.Tune in to the stations that the customer would normally receive and check if video and audio are normal.

4 Check the buttons and controls.Use the buttons and controls on the remote control unit and main unit and check if they operate properly.

5 Check the cabinet.Check for any scratches or dirt that have been made or attached on the cabinet after receiving the product for repair.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

15

5 6 7 8

3.2 QUICK REFERENCE

Notes when visiting for service1. Notes when disassembling/reassembling 1 Rear case When reassembling the rear case, the screws must be tightened in a specific order. Be careful not to tighten them in the wrong order forcibly. For details, see "Rear Case" in "7. DISASSEMBLY". 2 Attaching screws for the HDMI connector When attaching the HDMI connector after replacing the Main Assy, secure the HDMI connector manually with a screwdriver, but not with an electric screwdriver. If you tighten the screws too tightly with an electric screwdriver, the screw heads may be damaged, in which case the screws cannot be untightened/tightened any more.

2. On parts replacement 1 How to discharge before replacing the Assys A charge of significant voltage remains in the Plasma Panel even after the power is turned off. Safely discharge the panel before replacement of parts, in either manner indicated below: A: Let the panel sit at least for 3 minutes after the power is turned off. B: Turn the Large Signal System off before the power is turned off then, after 1 minute, turn the power off. For details, see "5.6.1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON/OFF FUNCTION". 2 On the settings after replacement of the Assys Some boards need settings made after replacement of the Assys. For details, see "8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT".

3. On various settings 1 Setting in Factory mode After a Mask indication into the panel is performed, be sure to set the Mask setting to "OFF" then exit Factory mode.

Adjustments and Settings after replacement of the Assys (Procedures in Factory mode)

1. Digital Video Assy: Transfer of backup data 1 Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {BACKUP DATA}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], press [j] seven times, then press [ENTER/SET].) 2 Select {TRANSFER}, using [l], then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. 3 After transfer of backup data is completed, {ETC} is automatically selected, and the LED on the front panel returns to normal lighting.

2. MAIN Assy: Execution of FINAL SETUP. 1 Select {INITIALIZE} then {FINAL SETUP}, then press [ENTER/SET]. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] three times, then press [j] four times.) 2 Select "YES", using [l]. Then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. 3 After "FINAL SETUP IS COMPLETE" is displayed on the screen, turn the POWER switch of the main unit off.

3. POWER SUPPLY Unit: Clearance of the accumulated power-on count and maximum temperature value 1 Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {P COUNT INFO}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], press [j] seven times, press [ENTER/SET], then press [j] six times.) 2 Press [l] to select "CLEAR". Hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. After clearance is completed, "ETC" is automatically selected. Clear the maximum temperature value (MAX TEMP) in the same manner.

4. Other Assys: Clearance of the maximum temperature value 1 Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {MAX TEMP}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER], press [j] seven times, press [ENTER/SET], then press [j] seven times.) 2 Press [l] to select "CLEAR". Hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. After clearance is completed, "ETC" is automatically selected.

How to locate several items on the Factory menu

1. Confirmation of accumulated power-on time and power-on count Select {INFORMATION} then {HOUR METER}. (After entering Factory mode, press [j] five times.)

2. Confirmation of the Power-down and Shutdown histories 1 Panel system PD: Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {POWER DOWN}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], then press [j] three times.) SD: Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {SHUT DOWN}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], then press [j] four times.) 2 MTB section Select {INFORMATION} then {MAIN NG}. (After entering Factory mode, press [j] three times.)

3. How to display the Mask indication 1 Mask indication in the panel side 1. Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {RASTER MASK SETUP}. (After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], then press [j] 8 times.) 2. Press [ENTER/SET], then select a Mask indication, using [i] or [j].

{ } : Item on the Factory menu[ ] : Key on the remote control unit" " : Screen indication

Quick Reference upon Service Visit 1Notes, PD/SD diagnosis, and methods for various settings

ItemNo. of LEDsflashing

PD/SD

1 TRAP SW

2 Rewriting software

LED Display Information

Red 2

Red 3

Red 4

Red 5

Red 6

Red 7

Red 8

Red 9

Red 10

Red 11

Red 12

Red 15

Blue 1

Blue 2

Blue 3

Blue 4

Blue 5

Blue 6

Blue 7

Blue 8

Blue 9

Blue 10

Blue 11

Blue 12

Blue 13

Blue 14

Blue 15

Red BlueSQ_LSI

Communication with the module IIC

DIGITAL-RST2

Panel high temperature

Audio/ Short-circuit SP terminal

Communication with the Module UCOM

Main 3-wire serial communication

Main IIC communication

Communication with the Main UCOM

FAN

Unit high temperature

Digital Tuner communication

MTB-RST2/RST4

Home Media Gallery

Main EEPROM

POWER

SCAN

SCN-5V

Y-DRIVE

Y-DCDC

Y-SUS

ADRS

X-DRIVE

X-DCDC

X-SUS

DIG-DCDC

UNKNOWN

Pane

l sec

tion

MT

B s

ecti

on

3 PD (2-15)

4 SD (1-15)

5 No backup

This indication does not display all LED patterns.For details, please refer to 5.1.1 LED DISPLAY INFORMATION.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD16

1 2 3 4

Structure of Layers in Service Factory Mode

INFORMATION mode 1. VERSION (1) The software versions for each microcomputer 2. VERSION (2) The Flash memory versions for each device 3. VERSION (3) The Flash memory versions for each device 4. MAIN NG The shutdown message ID/event times (Going Clear mode by [ENTER/SET] key) 4-1. CLEAR Select Yes by [l] key l pushing and hold [ENTER/SET] key 5. TEMPERATURE The temperature/FAN rotating status/Room Light Sensor 6. HOUR METER The HOUR METER/P-COUNT information 6-1. CLEAR Select Yes by [l] key l pushing and hold [ENTER/SET] key 7. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 The information of HDMI information files 8. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 The information of HDMI information files 9. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 The signal information of VDEC 10. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 The signal information of VDEC 11. DTV TUNING STATUS 1 Detail information for DTV 12. DTV TUNING STATUS 2 Detail information for DTV 13. DTV TUNING STATUS 3 Detail information for DTV 14. DTV TV-GUIDE BER For production line use 15. DEBUG INFO For factory use

PANEL FACTORY mode Refer to [PANEL FACTORY MODE]

OPTION mode 1. EDID WRITE MODE For factory use 2. ANTENNA MODE For production line use 3. AFT For production line use 4. SYNC DET For technical analysis

INITIALIZE mode 1. SIDE MASK LEVEL For factory use 1-1. SIDE MASK LEVEL 2. FINAL SETUP Set to Factory default settings (it should perform after 2-1. DATA RESET replacing a MAIN Assy) 3. HMG/HG SERVICE MODE Information for a USB device is displayed 3-1. MODE SHIFT 4. Wide XGA AUTO For technical analysis

Quick Reference upon Service Visit 2Mode transition and structure of layers in Service Factory mode

INFORMATION mode 1. VERSION (1) 2. VERSION (2), (3) 3. MAIN NG 4. TEMPERATURE 5. HOUR METER 6. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 7. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 8. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 9. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 10. DTV TUNING STATUS 1, 2, 3 11. DTV TV-GUIDE BER 12. DEBUG INFO

PANEL FACTORY mode 1. PANEL INFORMATION 2. PANEL WORKS 3. POWER DOWN 4. SHUT DOWN 5. PANEL-1 ADJ 6. PANEL-2 ADJ 7. PANEL FUNCTION 8. ETC. 9. RASTER MASK SETUP10. PATTEN MASK SETUP11. COMBI MASK SETUP

INITIALIZE mode 1. SIDE MASK LEVEL 2. FINAL SETUP 3. Wide XGA AUTO

OPTION mode 1. EDID WRITE MODE 2. ANTENNA MODE 3. AFT 4. SYNC DET

• To shift to another mode, press [MUTING].• To shift to another item in a specific mode, press [i] or [j].• To shift to the next nested layer below for an item with a "(+)" indication, press [ENTER/SET]. To return to the next nested layer above, also press [ENTER/SET].

Mode transition in Service Factory modeUp

Down

Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 2

7. PANEL FUNCTION (+) 1. R-LEVEL 2. G-LEVEL 3. B-LEVEL 4. ADDRESS L1 Items for use by engineers 5. ADDRESS L2 • • • • • 11. ADDRESS U4 12. STK MODE 8. ETC (+) 1. BACKUP DATA For transferring backup data (after replacement of the DIGITAL Assy) 2. DIGITAL EEPROM To clear data of the digital video 3. PD INFO. 4. SD INFO. For clearance of data for the corresponding items. 5. HR-MTR INFO. The clearing method is the same: Select "CLEAR", 6. PM/B1-B5 using [l], then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at 7. P COUNT INFO. least 5 seconds. After clearance is completed, {ETC} 8. MAX TEMP. is automatically selected. 9. RASTER MASK SETUP (+) 1. MASK OFF 2. RST MASK 01 For use while Raster Mask (full mask) is displayed. • • • • • Use [i] or [j] to select the type of mask. 26. RST MASK 25 10. PATTEN MASK SETUP (+) 1. MASK OFF 2. PTN MASK 01 For use while Pattern Mask is displayed. Use [i] or • • • • • [j] to select the type of mask. 50. PTN MASK 49 11. COMBI MASK SETUP (+) 1. MASK OFF 2. CMB MASK 01 For use while Combination Mask is displayed. • • • • • Use [i] or [j] to select the type of mask. 18. CMB MASK 17

Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 1 1. PANEL INFORMATION Version indication of the panel 2. PANEL WORKS Indications of the accumulated power-on time, pulse-meter count, and power-on count of the panel 3. POWER DOWN Indication of the Power-down history 4. SHUT DOWN Indication of the Shutdown history 5. PANEL-1 ADJ (+) 1. VOL SUS 2. VOL OFFSET • • • • • 8. VOL YNOFS4 9. RESET1ST_KSB 10. RESET2ND_KSB • • • • • 23. YSTL_FMR_HZ 24. SUS FREQ

6. PANEL-2 ADJ (+) 1. R-HIGH 2. G-HIGH 3 .B-HIGH Parameters for the WB adjustment of the panel, which are 4. R-LOW required during adjustment after panel replacement 5. G-LOW 6. B-LOW 7. ABL Setting of the power consumption. A setting table is available for each vertical signal.

To "Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 2"

For AM noise prevention (Depending on the mode,brightness of the screen changes.)For confirmation of the result of the setting change, the unit must be turned off then back on again.

Modification not required because these items are basically for factory presetting

Settings required after replacement of the panel

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

17

5 6 7 8

3.3 PCB LOCATION

50F X DRIVEAssy

50F Y DRIVEAssy

50F

SC

AN

DA

ssy

50F

SC

AN

CA

ssy

50F

SC

AN

AA

ssy

50F

SC

AN

BA

ssy

SID

E K

EY

Ass

y

SID

E IO

Ass

yF

HD

PO

WE

R S

WA

ssy

MAINAssy

TANSHI Assy

POWER SUPPLYUnit

FHD RLSAssyFHD IR Assy

Bottom view Rear view

50FHD LED Assy

Front view

50F ADDRESS SAssy

50F ADDRESS LAssy

50F ADDRESS LAssy

50F ADDRESS LAssy

50F DIGITALAssy

50F ADDRESS SAssy

FHD FAN CONNECTAssy

PANEL SENSORAssy

50F ADDRESS LAssy

50F ADDRESS LAssy

50F ADDRESS LAssy

Mark No. Description Part No.LIST OF ASSEMBLIESNSP 50F ADDRESS L ASSY AWW1310NSP 50F ADDRESS S ASSY AWW1311

NSP 50F SCAN A ASSY AWW1312 IC2801 - IC2804 AN16174ANSP 50F SCAN B ASSY AWW1313 IC2901 - IC2904 AN16174ANSP 50F SCAN C ASSY AWW1314 IC3001 - IC3004 AN16174ANSP 50F SCAN D ASSY AWW1315 IC3101 - IC3104 AN16174A

50F X DRIVE ASSY AWV2510 50F Y DRIVE ASSY AWV2511 PANEL SENSOR ASSY AWW1309 50F DIGITAL ASSY AWW1316

Mark No. Description Part No.

> MAIN ASSY AWV2457

SIDE IO ASSY AWW1274 SIDE KEY ASSY AWW1275 TANSHI ASSY AWW1334 FHD IR ASSY AWW1289 FHD FAN CONNECT ASSY AWW1290

50FHD LED ASSY AWW1291 FHD RLS ASSY AWW1292 FHD POWER SW ASSY AWW1293

POD ASSY AWW1295

> POWER SUPPLY UNIT AXY1168

PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F AWU1272

PODAssy

The wiring shown in the photo is different from the actual wiring, because the product in the photo is a prototype.Upon servicing, be sure to restore the original wiring of the unit after repair work.

Note:

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD18

1 2 3 4

3.4 JIGS LIST

3.5 CLEANING

Service Cotton Cloth Glove GYX1002 7.3 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM

Name Jig No. Remarks

Name Part No. Remarks

Cleaning liquid GEM1004 Used to fan cleaning.Refer to “10.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2)”.Cleaning paper GED-008

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

19

5 6 7 8

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD20

1 2 3 4

4. BLOCK DIAGRAM4.1 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

21

5 6 7 8

When ordering service parts, be sure to refer to "EXPLODED VIEWS and PARTS LIST" or "PCB PARTS LIST". The mark found on some component parts indicates the importance of the safety factor of the part. Therefore, when replacing, be sure to use parts of identical designation.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD22

1 2 3 4

4.2 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)

V+8V_AU

V+3_3V_A

V+3_3V_AU_D

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

23

5 6 7 8

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD24

1 2 3 4

4.3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)

50F Y DRIVE ASSY

50F SCAN A ASSY(HIGH-SIDE_HIGH)

50F SCAN B ASSY(HIGH-SIDE_LOW)

50F SCAN C ASSY(LOW-SIDE_HIGH)

50F SCAN D ASSY(LOW-SIDE_LOW)

Scan ICIC2804

Scan ICIC2803

Scan ICIC2802

Scan ICIC2801

PSUS

Scan SignalVH IC5V

SA1

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

Scan ICIC2904

Scan ICIC2903

Scan ICIC2902

Scan ICIC2901

VH IC5V

SB1

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

Scan ICIC3004

Scan ICIC3003

Scan ICIC3002

Scan ICIC3001

VH IC5VSC1

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

Scan ICIC3104

Scan ICIC3103

Scan ICIC3102

Scan ICIC3101

VH IC5V SD1

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

SB2

PSUS

Scan Signal

Scan Signal

VHIC5V

SC2

Scan Signal

VHIC5V

Y 1

Y 3

PSUS

PSUS

Scan Signal

IC5V

Y 5

Y 9

Y 8

+16.5V

IC5V/VFDC/DC CONV.

IC5V VC_P+16.5V

15VDC/DC

CONV.

VC_S VC_U

+5V

LOGICBLOCK

Drive Signal

VSUS

VYPRSTVSNOFS

VKNOFS2VKNOFS3

VKNOFS4

VKNOFS1

MAINDC/DCCONV.

VH

VHIC5V

Y 2

Photo CouplerBLOCK

Y 4

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

SUSPreDrive

+16.5V

VC_S

H-M

SK

VC_S

L-M

SK

+16.5V

KNOFS1KNOFS3BLOCK

VKNOFS1

VKNOFS3

RESONANCEBLOCK

VC_U +16.5V

Drive Signal

VC_P

PRSTBLOCK

VYPRST

RST-DBLOCK

+16.5V

+16.5V

KNOFS4SOFT-GBLOCK

VC_SVKNOFS4

+16.5V

SNOFSKNOFS2BLOCK

VSNOFSVKNOFS2

VC_S

Drive Signal

SUSO

UT

MSK-S

Gate

Sig

nal

VADR+8V

+3.3V

VADR+8V

+3.3V

VADR+8V

+3.3V

VADR+8V

+3.3V

Y 6

Y 7

+16.5V

+5V

VSUS

+6.5V

REG

+5.1V

VADR+8V

REGREG

+3.3V

12V

RESONANCEBLOCK

VC_U +16.5V

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

VHIC5V

50F ADDRESS L ASSYDRIVER IC

IC1661DRIVER IC

IC1671DRIVER IC

IC1681

CLK / LE / HBLK / LBLKR/G/B

DRIVER ICIC1651

VDDLS4VADR4VADR3 VDDLS3VADR2VADR1 VDDLS2VDDLS1

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

V+60V

V+

8V V+3.3V

IC1601LVDS

ReceiverAN/P BN/PCN/P DN/PCLKN/P

AD1CN1602

AD2CN1601


IC1661DRIVER IC

IC1671DRIVER IC

IC1681


DRIVER ICIC1651


RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

V+60V

V+

8V V+3.3V

IC1601LVDS


AD1CN1602

AD2CN1601

50F ADDRESS S ASSY

VADR3VDDLS3 VADR2 VADR1VDDLS2 VDDLS1

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

V+60VV+

8V

V+3.3VIC1801LVDS

Receiver

AN/P BN/PCN/P DN/PCLKN/P

AD1CN1802

AD2CN1801

50F ADDRESS L ASSYA B C D



DRIVER ICIC1651

DRIVER ICIC1661

DRIVER ICIC1671

DRIVER ICIC1681

DRIVER ICIC1851

DRIVER ICIC1861

DRIVER ICIC1871

VDDLS4 VADR4 VADR3VDDLS3 VADR2 VADR1VDDLS2 VDDLS1

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

V+60VV+

8V

V+3.3VIC1601LVDS

Receiver


AD1CN1602

AD2CN1601

50F DIGITAL ASSY

V+3_3V_D

OR

LVDS

ADR_

PD1

SCAN,YSUS

ODI_

R, G

, B

DAC

PulseWidth

ODI_

SYNC

UART

V+3V_EE

ADR PD MSK

INP_MUTE

MASK PulseWidth

ADRS PD

DAC

RELAY2

RELA

Y2

MSE

L

V+3_3V_DV+1_2V_D

V+1_1V_DV+1_8V_DV+3_3V_D

V+1_1V_D

V+2_5V_D

1.2VREG.

V+2_5V_D V+1_2V_D

1.8VREG.

V+2_5V_D V+1_8V_D

D24

SCL,

SDA

TEM

P1

D21

D16

D15

D14

D13

STOP_SQ

VH_UV_PD,YDRIVE_PD,YRESNC_PD,YDD_CHV_PD,IC5V_UV_PD

VOFS_ADJ,YPRST_ADJ,XKNOFS1_2_ADJ,XKNOFS3_ADJ,XKNOFS4_ADJ,

SCL,SDA

SCL,SDA

Flash MemoryIC3302

UART

LVDSRecieverIC3201

V+3VACTV

D11

SQ_NON

PD_TRG_B, AC_DET, M_SW_DET

Vsus_ADJ

DC-DCCONVERTER

BD8602FVIC3801

+B for RELAY DRIVE

SECONDARY

+35V

+60V

VSUS

PS_PDRELAY

EXT_PD

+16.5V+6.5V

VSUS_ADJ

+5.1V

T402+5.1V

STB5.1VSTB3.3V

STB3.3V+12V

STB5.1V

P10

+16.5V

+6.5V

+12V

+16.5V

+16.5V+6.5V

DRF_SW_B

AC_DET

M_SW_DET

PD_TRIG_B

DRF_B

US_SW

Q203

+12V

+12V

T401

+5.1V

+5.1V

AC_DETM_SW_DET

IC202 152

AC_DET

P1P2

P7P6

P5P4

P8P9

P12

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

25

5 6 7 8

: Wire harness

PANELSENSORASSY

FHD POWERSW ASSY

POWER SUPPLYUNIT

: FFC

50F X DRIVE ASSY

Drive Signal

X 1

PSUS

+16.5

OFFSETBLOCK

VPOFS

VXKOFS1VXKOFS2

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

Gate SignalDrive Signal

RESONANCE BLOCK

PSUS

+5V

OFFSETReg.

Drive Signal

SUSPreDrive

PU+16.5V

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

SOFT-D

+16.5

XPRST

+16.5 VSUS

+16.5V PSUS

LOGICBLOCK

+16.5V15V

DC/DC CONV.

VPUVPOFS

REGULATOR

REGULATOR+12V

+5.1V

+8V

+3.3V

X 7

+60V +12V +5.1V

+16.5V+5V

VSUS +6.5V

X 2

REGULATOR

X 6

+60V +8V +3.3V

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

X 5

+60V +8V +3.3V

X 4

+3.3V+8V+60V

X 3

+3.3V+8V+60V

50F ADDRESS S ASSY


DRIVER ICIC1861

DRIVER ICIC1871

DRIVER ICIC1851

VADR3 VDDLS3VADR2VADR1 VDDLS2VDDLS1

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

V+60V

V+

8V V+3.3V

IC1801LVDS


AD1CN1802

AD2CN1801


IC1661DRIVER IC

IC1671DRIVER IC

IC1681


DRIVER ICIC1651


RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

V+60V

V+

8V V+3.3V

IC1601LVDS


AD1CN1602

AD2CN1601

50F ADDRESS L ASSY


DRIVER ICIC1651

DRIVER ICIC1661

DRIVER ICIC1671

DRIVER ICIC1681


RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

V+60VV+

8V

V+3.3VIC1601LVDS

Receiver


AD1CN1602

AD2CN1601

50F ADDRESS L ASSY


DRIVER ICIC1651

DRIVER ICIC1661

DRIVER ICIC1671

DRIVER ICIC1681


RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

V+60VV+

8V

V+3.3VIC1601LVDS

Receiver


AD1CN1602

AD2CN1601

OR

+5_1V

PS_PWDN

PD

XSUS

PSIZE

LVDS

THEA

TER

VD

AND

AND

AND

DRF_RELAY

DRF_

SW_B

PSW2

PSW2

+5_1V

XKOFS1_ADJ,XKNOFS2_ADJ

OR

RELA

Y

RESET

RESET

RST_SQ

V+3V_D

EXT_

PD

RST2

SUS_

MUT

E

EVI_

R, G

, B

EVI_

SYNC

DRF_B

RELAY

RESETX

AND

LVDS

D23SE1

LVDSRecieverIC3202

SUB-FILD CONV.&

XY DRV SEQUENCEPATTERN GEN.PEG383B-K

IC3301

LVDSTRANSMITTER

PEG384BIC3401

MODULE UCOM

M30620FCPGPIC3601

V+3VACTVV+3VACTV

PD_MUTE

PSW1

D22

D20

D19

D18

D17

XSUSTN_PD,XDD_CNV_PD,XDRIVE_PD

SW2

D10 1

RY102

LIVE

NEUTRAL

AC INLET

PRIMARY

T901

+390 V

D109

D108

T701

T501

T101

P3

Q702

Q701

Switching

Switching

Switching

IC101

P11

+35V+16.5V+12V

F101

D106

Q902

Q901

Q502

Q501

Switching

Switching

Switching

Switching

PFC Q101 Q102 Q103

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD26

1 2 3 4

4.4 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)

Antenna BInput

Input

U6001AXF1171

(Frontend)

AXF1178(Frontend)

IC600274HC4066

U6101

SDA_AV5SCL_AV5

SIF_SW

Antenna A

SIF_OUT

IC6001LA72702NVA

IC61027W66FU

FE_I2C_SEL

SDA_AV5SCL_AV5

SDA_AV5SCL_AV5

AIR_RAIR_L

SW_L/R

AUDIO OutputAUDIO_OUT_L/R

SUB WOOFER

IC4601R2S11006FT

(AVSW)

L/R

L/RInput 1

Input 2 Y/Pb/Pr

V

Y/C

V

DA_GY

L/R PC Input

Modulator IR_R

EP

EA

TE

R

RE

M

GY_VDEC

VBI_YV

L/R

L/RInput 4 HDMI

Input 5 HDMI

Input2_Y/Pb/Pr

L/R

TANSHI ASSY

MAIN ASSY

V

MAP5601M(MAP)

Input 3IC4701

R2S11001FT(RGBSW)

DA_RCRDA_BCBDA_GY

SDA_AV5SCL_AV5

CLP_RGB

Input3_Y/Pb/Pr

SIDE IO ASSY

PC_RGB

PC_H/VPC Input

SDA_AVSCL_AV

I2S_BCLK_DTVI2S_LRCLK_DTVI2S_SDATA_DTVSPDIF_DTV

I2S_BCLK_HDMII2S_LRCLK_HDMII2S_SDATA_HDMISPDIF_HDMI

IC8301AGC1037-RS232C

TXD/RXD

SR_OUTRXD_SR+TXD_SR+

REM

(IF UCOM)

REM

IC9201TAS5122DCA-TBB

(D-AMP) REM

IC7001TC90173FG

KEY_AD1/AD2

DS

_IF_P

DS

_IF_N

KEY

IC6401BCM7038

POD Card

IC6301BCM3517

POD ASSYUSB

IC9101

FHD IR ASSY

SIDE KEY ASSY

232C_DET

I2C_T

UN

ER

_SC

L

I2C_T

UN

ER

_SD

A

AIR1_V

AIR2_V

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

27

5 6 7 8

M_SW_DET

AC_DET_DRV

MAIN_Y/C

IC4801CM0048BF

(VDEC)

SDA_MBVD3,4HD3,4

RA_0GA_0BA_0

IC4101BU8254KVT

(LVDS)

DIN3

SUB_Y/C DIN4

VD_0HD_0

MD_VDECMA_VDEC

MCTRL

IC4102BU8254KVT

(LVDS)

RB_0GB_0BB_0

IC8001PD6568A-K

(ARIA)

HY57V161610FTP(SDRAM)

IC8201EDD1232ABBH(128Mbit DDR)

MA_ARIA_AMD_ARIA_A

DIN5_RCRDIN5_BCBDIN5_GY

IC8202EDD1232ABBH(128Mbit DDR)

IC8203EDD1232ABBH

HD5

MA_ARIA_BMD_ARIA_B

MA_ARIA_CMD_ARIA_C

IC5001AD9985KSTZ

(ADC)RCR_ADBCB_ADGY_AD

HD_PLLHOLD_PLLCLP_AD

SDA_AVSCL_AV

(128Mbit DDR)

IC8204AGC1049

EXD_ARIAEXA_ARIA

VD

6H

D6

DIN

6_BC

BD

IN6_R

CR

DIN

6_GY

DIN

1_DV

O

EXT_HD1/VD1

RS

T_A

SIC

RX

D_IC

3T

XD

_IC3

AGC1049-(16Mbit Flash)

VD

1H

D1

VD

7H

D7

TXD_MDRXD_MDREQ_MD

VD

7_0H

D7_0

IC8401UPD61123F1

IC5201SII9025CTU(HDMI RX)

LED_ON1/ON2/OFF

(EMMA2SV)

RST3

IC5101CXB1442

DS

CL_1

DS

DA

_1

Input 5HDMI

Input 4HDMI

IC8402AGC1039-(FLASH)

IC4310PQ200WNA1ZPH(FAN CONTROL)

IC4303PQ200WNA1ZPH(FAN CONTROL)

Input 6HDMI

Input 7HDMI

(HDMI SW)

TRAP SW

LED TRAP SW

50 FHD LED ASSY

FHD FANCONNECTASSY

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

DIGITALASSY

SCL_MB

TXD_IF/RXD_IF

TXD/RXD_DT

RE

Q_V

DE

CR

ST

_AS

IC IC4802

INT_HD1/VD1

FANFAN FAN FAN

A0 to 19DQ0 to 15

FAN_ON1/CONT1 FAN_ON2/CONT2

SC

L_MB

SD

A_M

B

RS

T_A

SIC

HD

MI_IN

T

DIN

7_BC

B/R

CR

/GY

DIN

7_ALP

HA

: Analog Audio signal: Analog Video signal: Component signal: Digital Video signal: Digital Audio signal: Synchronized signal: Data signal: Control signal: RF signal

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD28

1 2 3 4

4.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

D10

1

RY

102

+B

for

Rel

ay D

rive

LIV

E

NE

UT

RA

L

PR

IMA

RY

SE

CO

ND

AR

Y

+35

V

+60

V

VS

US

T90

1

PF

C Q

101

Q10

2Q

103

PS

_PD

RE

LAY

EX

T_P

D

+39

0V D10

9

D10

8

T70

1

T50

1 T10

1

P3

P1 P2

P7

P6

P5 P8

+16

.5V

+6.

5V

VS

US

_AD

J

Q70

2

Q70

1S

witc

hing

Sw

itchi

ng

P4

+5.

1V

T40

2+

5.1V

P9

Sw

itchi

ng

IC10

1

P12

ST

B5.

1VS

TB

3.3V

ST

B3.

3V+

12V

ST

B5.

1V

P11

P10

+16

.5V

+6.

5V

+12

V

+16

.5V+

16.5

V+

6.5V

+35

V+

16.5

V+

12V

F10

1

D10

6

DR

F_S

W_B

AC

_DE

T

M_S

W_D

ET

PD

_TR

IG_B

DR

F_B

US

_SW

Q20

3

Q90

2

Q90

1

Q50

2

Q50

1

Sw

itchi

ng

Sw

itchi

ng

Sw

itchi

ng

Sw

itchi

ng

+12

V

+12

V

T40

1

+5.

1V

+5.

1V

AC

_DE

TM

_SW

_DE

T

IC20

2

AC

_DE

T

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

29

5 6 7 8

4.6 50F X DRIVE ASSY

50F X DRIVE ASSY

Drive Signal

X 1

PSUS

+16.5

OFFSETBLOCK

VPOFS

VXKOFS1VXKOFS2

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

Gate SignalDrive Signal

RESONANCE BLOCK

PSUS

+5V

OFFSETReg.

Drive Signal

SUSPreDrive

PU+16.5V

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

SOFT-D

+16.5

XPRST

+16.5 VSUS

+16.5V PSUS

LOGICBLOCK

+16.5V15V

DC/DC CONV.

VPUVPOFS

REGULATOR

REGULATOR+12V

+5.1V

+8V

+3.3V

X 7

+60V +12V +5.1V

+16.5V+5V

VSUS +6.5V

X 2

REGULATOR

X 6

+60V +8V +3.3V

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

X 5

+60V +8V +3.3V

X 4

+3.3V+8V+60V

X 3

+3.3V+8V+60V

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD30

1 2 3 4

4.7 50F Y DRIVE, 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS

50F Y DRIVE ASSY

50F SCAN A ASSY(HIGH-SIDE_HIGH)

50F SCAN B ASSY(HIGH-SIDE_LOW)

50F SCAN C ASSY(LOW-SIDE_HIGH)

50F SCAN D ASSY(LOW-SIDE_LOW)

Scan ICIC2804

Scan ICIC2803

Scan ICIC2802

Scan ICIC2801

PSUS

Scan SignalVH IC5V

SA1

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

Scan ICIC2904

Scan ICIC2903

Scan ICIC2902

Scan ICIC2901

VH IC5V

SB1

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

Scan ICIC3004

Scan ICIC3003

Scan ICIC3002

Scan ICIC3001

VH IC5VSC1

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

Scan ICIC3104

Scan ICIC3103

Scan ICIC3102

Scan ICIC3101

VH IC5V SD1

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

VH IC5V

SB2

PSUS

Scan Signal

Scan Signal

VHIC5V

SC2

Scan Signal

VHIC5V

Y 1

Y 3

PSUS

PSUS

Scan Signal

IC5V

Y 5

Y 9

Y 8

+16.5V

IC5V/VFDC/DC CONV.

IC5V VC_P+16.5V

15VDC/DC

CONV.

VC_S VC_U

+5V

LOGICBLOCK

Drive Signal

VSUS

VYPRSTVSNOFS

VKNOFS2VKNOFS3

VKNOFS4

VKNOFS1

MAINDC/DCCONV.

VH

VHIC5V

Y 2

Photo CouplerBLOCK

Y 4

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

SUSPreDrive

+16.5V

VC_S

H-M

SK

VC_S

L-M

SK

+16.5V

KNOFS1KNOFS3BLOCK

VKNOFS1

VKNOFS3

RESONANCEBLOCK

VC_U +16.5V

Drive Signal

VC_P

PRSTBLOCK

VYPRST

RST-DBLOCK

+16.5V

+16.5V

KNOFS4SOFT-GBLOCK

VC_SVKNOFS4

+16.5V

SNOFSKNOFS2BLOCK

VSNOFSVKNOFS2

VC_S

Drive Signal

SUSO

UT

MSK-S

Gate

Sig

nal

VADR+8V

+3.3V

VADR+8V

+3.3V

VADR+8V

+3.3V

VADR+8V

+3.3V

Y 6

Y 7

+16.5V

+5V

VSUS

+6.5V

REG

+5.1V

VADR+8V

REGREG

+3.3V

12V

RESONANCEBLOCK

VC_U +16.5V

VSUS

SUSBLOCK

VHIC5V

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

31

5 6 7 8

4.8 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of 50F X, Y DRIVE and 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS

Note:VYPRST, VSNOFS, VYKOFS12, VYKOFS3, VYKOFS4 VXKOFS1 and VXKOFS2 voltages are electrical volume controls.

50F SCAN A, B, C, D ASSYS

50F Y DRIVE ASSY 50F X DRIVE ASSY3.3V 5.1V 3.3V 5.1V

fromPOWERSUPPLY

toADDRESS ASSY

fromPOWERSUPPLY

toADDRESS ASSY

5.0V

9V 12V 9.0V 12V

5.0V 6.5V 5.0V 6.5V

16.5V 16.5V

VSUS VSUS

VF1 VFVF2

VPOFS

VF3IC5V

VH

VXKOFS1

VXKOFS2

IC5V VH

5V

IC5V

ScanLogic

Scan IC

15V

HMSKFET

Predrive

Logic

5V

DC/DCConv.

SUS-GFET

Predrive

SUS-BFET

Predrive

SUS-UIGBT

Predrive

SUS-DIGBT

Predrive

XPRSTFET

Predrive

XSOFT-GFET

Predrive

XKOFS1FET

Predrive

XKOFS2FET

Predrive

VXKOFS1Reg.

VXKOFS2Reg.

Logic

SUS-GFET

Predrive

SUS-BFET

Predrive

SUS-UIGBT

Predrive

SUS-DIGBT

Predrive

LMSKFET

Predrive

YPRSTFET

Predrive

SNOFSFET

Predrive

YKOFS1

FET

Predrive

YKOFS2

FET

Predrive

YKOFS3

FET

Predrive

YKOFS4

FET

Predrive

RST-DFET

Predrive

VYKOFS12

Reg.

VYKOFS3

Reg.

VYKOFS4

Reg.

DC/DCConv.

VSNOFSReg.

VYPRSTReg.

SOFT-GFET

Predrive

3.3V

9V

3.3V

9V

DC/DC Conv.

DC/DC Conv.

Reg.IC Reg.IC

Reg.IC

Reg.IC

Reg.IC

Reg.IC

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD32

1 2 3 4

4.9 50F ADDRESS L and S ASSYS

50F ADDRESS S ASSY

50F ADDRESS L ASSY

DRIVER ICIC1661

DRIVER ICIC1671

DRIVER ICIC1681



DRIVER ICIC1861

DRIVER ICIC1871

DRIVER ICIC1851

DRIVER ICIC1651


VADR3 VDDLS3VADR2VADR1 VDDLS2VDDLS1

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

RESONANCEBLOCK

V+60V

V+

8V V+3.3V

V+60V

V+

8V V+3.3V

IC1601LVDS

Receiver

IC1801LVDS

Receiver



AD1CN1602

AD1CN1802

AD2CN1801

AD2CN1601

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

33

5 6 7 8

4.10 50F DIGITAL ASSY

50F DIGITAL ASSY

OR

+5_1V

V+3_3V_D

OR

LVDS

ADR_

PD1

PS_PWDN

PD

XSUS

SCAN,YSUS

ODI_

R, G

, B

PSIZE

LVDS

DAC

THEA

TER

PulseWidth

VD

ODI_

SYNC

UART

V+3V_EE

ADR PD MSK

AND

AND

AND

DRF_RELAY

INP_MUTE

DRF_

SW_B

PSW2

PSW2

MASK PulseWidth

ADRS PD

+5_1V

DAC

XKOFS1_ADJ,XKNOFS2_ADJ

OR

RELA

Y

RELAY2

RELA

Y2

MSE

L

RESET

V+3_3V_DV+1_2V_D

RESET

RST_SQ

V+3V_D

EXT_

PD

RST2

SUS_MUTE

EVI_

R, G

, B

EVI_

SYNC

DRF_B

RELAY

V+1_1V_DV+1_8V_DV+3_3V_D

RESETX

AND

V+1_1V_D

V+2_5V_D

LVDS

1.2VREG.

V+2_5V_D V+1_2V_D

1.8VREG.

V+2_5V_D V+1_8V_D

D23D24

SCL,

SDA

TEM

P1

D21

D16

D15

D14

D13

STOP_SQ

VH_UV_PD,YDRIVE_PD,YRESNC_PD,YDD_CHV_PD,IC5V_UV_PD

VOFS_ADJ,YPRST_ADJ,XKNOFS1_2_ADJ,XKNOFS3_ADJ,XKNOFS4_ADJ,

SCL,SDA

SCL,SDA

Flash MemoryIC3302

UART

LVDSRecieverIC3201

LVDSRecieverIC3202

V+3VACTV

D11

SUB-FILD CONV.&

XY DRV SEQUENCEPATTERN GEN.PEG383B-K

IC3301

LVDSTRANSMITTER

PEG384BIC3401

MODULE UCOM

M30620FCPGPIC3601

V+3VACTVV+3VACTV

PD_MUTE

SQ_NON

PSW1

PD_TRG_B, AC_DET, M_SW_DET

Vsus_ADJ

DC-DCCONVERTER

BD8602FVIC3801

D22

D20

D19

D18

D17

XSUSTN_PD,XDD_CNV_PD,XDRIVE_PD

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD34

1 2 3 4

4.11 MAIN ASSY (DTV BLOCK DIAGRAM)

CIMaX sp2[IC7302]

1Chip System ICBCM7038KPB1G-B2-K

[IC6401]

SDRAM[IC6602]256Mbit

SPDIF out

Tuner

[U6101]

AIR1_V

I2C1

QPSK IF

TS

Demodulate ICBCM3517

KQLGB0-K[IC6301]

SAWfilter

RF AGC

To TANSHI ASSY[CN4001]




QPSK IFDown Conv.

[IC6201]

IF SW[IC6103]

EEPROM64Kbit

IF

.

.

.

HSX_0

I2C_TUNER_SCL

I2C_TUNER_SDA

LogicCircuit

DVO[12bit]

OOB_Data

TS0I2C0

EBI BUS

ME

MO

RY

BU

S

UARTA

From EMMA2

To ARIA

To AV_SW

I2C SW[IC6102]

SCL_AV5

SDA_AV5

From VDECYUV(656)

[8bit]

To POD ASSY[CN4005/CN4006]

FLASH32M

[IC6902 ]

VBISLICER[IC7001 ]

I2S out

G-Link

IF AGC

From AV_SWVBI_Y

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

35

5 6 7 8

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD36

1 2 3 4

4.12 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of MAIN ASSY

V+35V V+12V V+6_5V

V+30V_ANT_AFAN_VCC1 V+5V_ANT_A

V+5V_ANT_A_SAW

V+5V_ANT_A_QPSKV+30V_ANT_B

V+5V_ANT_B

V+5V_ANT_B_MPX

V+8V_A V+5V_A_AV

V+8V_A_AV V+5V_A_7038

V+8V_A_DSP V+5V_A2_RGB

V+5V_A2_HDMI_ROM

V+5V_HNM

V+5_1V_STB V+3_3V_STB

V+5V_USBV+5_1V_STB V+3_3V_STB

POD_VPP (5.0V/3.3V)

V+3_3V_UCOM POD_VCC (3.3V)

V+3_3V_UCOM_ROM

V+5V_D

V+2_5V_UCOM V+3_3V_A_ADC

V+2_5V_UCOM_DDR

V+1_5V_UCOM

V+3_3V_A_VDEC

V+1_2V_D_7038

V+1_2V_D_3517

LC Filter(V+5V_D)

for SW, Audio, Ant_A, Ant_B, DSP

IC43055V-REG(V+5V_ANT_A)NJM2846DL3-05

for Ant_A, QPSK, Ant_B, MPX

STBY SW REG

SW REG CONTROLED BY RELAY

for Tuner for Main BoardFAN

for EMMA

for IF U COM

for AV_SW, RGB_SW, HDMIROM, 7038EEPROM, 7038IIC A/D

for USB, DLNA

IC6402Switch IC(V+5V_USB)R5523H001B

Filter(V+3_3V_UCOM)

for EMMA

for EMMA

IC43018V-LEG (Variable REG)(V+8V_AIR/AU/A/A2/DSP)PQ200WNA1ZPH

for POD VPP

for POD_VCC

Discrete30V-REG(V+30V_ANT_A)

Discrete30V-REG(V+30V_ANT_B)

IC4404DD com.(V+1_2V_D)LTC3416

for 7038, 3517

IC4501DD com.

DD com.

(V+2_5V_UCOM)LTC3407-2

IC4501

(V+1_5V_UCOM)LTC3407-1

2chDD com.LTC3407

IC4310Variable REG(FAN_VCC1)PQ200WNA1ZPH

IC43075V-REG(V+5V_A)NJM2846DL3-05

IC4309DD com.(V+5V_USB/DLNA)R1224N102H/RTQ040P02

IC4308Variable REG(POD_VPP)PQ200WNA1ZPH

IC4306DD com.(POD_VCC)R1224N102H/RTQ040P02

IC44013.3V-REG(V+3_3V_A)NJM2846DL3-33

Q4416FET Switch(V+3_3V_A_VDEC)RTQ040P02

for Tuner

Q4421FET Switch(V+3_3V_UCOM)RTQ040P02

FAN_VCC2

IC4303Variable REG(FAN_VCC2)PQ200WNA1ZPH

for FHD Panel FAN

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

37

5 6 7 8

V+5_1V

V+3_3V_A2_7038

V+3_3V_A2_DSP

V+3_3V_D_DSP V+3_3V_UCOM_VBI

V+3_3V_D_ADC V+3_3V_D_7038

V+3_3V_D_7038_ROM

V+3_3V_D_3517

V+3_3V_D_POD

V+3_3V_D2_VDEC

V+3_3V_D2_VDEC_RAM

V+3_3V_D3_HDMI

V+3_3V_D3_HDMISW

V+3_3V_D4_ARIA V+1_8V_A_HDMI

V+3_3V_D4_ARIA_ROM

V+3_3V_D4_LVDS

V+2_5V_D_7038 V+1_8V_A_VDEC

V+2_5V_D_7038_DDR

V+2_5V_D_3517

V+2_5V_D2_ARIA

V+2_5V_D2_ARIA_DDR

V+2_5V_UCOM_VBI

V+1_2V_D2_ARIA V+1_5V_UCOM_VBI

IC44033ch DD com.(V+2_5V_D)BD8602FV-3/SP8M4

Q4411FET Switch(V+2_5V_D2)RSS100N03

IC44033ch DD com.(V+1_2V_D2)BD8602FV-3/RSS100N03RSS090P03

3ch

DD c

om.B

D86

02FV

for 7038, 3517, ARIA, VBI

Q4415FET Switch(V+3_3V_D2)RTQ040P02

for VDEC_D, HDMI, HDMI_SW

IC44033ch DD com.(V+3_3V_D)BD8602FV-1/SP8M4

for 7038, 3517, POD, DT_D, DSP, ARIA, LVDS, VDEC_D, ADC, HDMI, HDMI_SW, VBI


for ARIA

Q4418FET Switch(V+3_3V_D3)RTQ045N03

IC44051.8V-REG(V+1_8V_A)NJM2846DL3-18

Q4422FET Switch(V+1_8V_A_VDEC)MCH3406


IC41061.5V-REG(V+1_5V_VDEC)NJM2886DL3-15

Q4515FET Switch

RTQ040P02(V+3_3V_D2)

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD38

1 2 3 4

4.13 TANSHI ASSY

TANSHI ASSY

for MAIN ASSY

for SIDE IO ASSY

for SIDE IO ASSY

for MAIN ASSY

MAP ICIC9101

MAP5601M

PWM

IO6

SDA_AV

DIGITAL AMP ICIC9201

TAS5122DCA

REGULATOR IC9181

NJM78M12DL1A

+1.8V

+16.5V +16.5V +12V

INPUT(AUDIO)

+16.5V

SCL_AV

REGULATOR IC9191NJM2846DL3

+3.3V +1.8V

+3.3V

IO3

RST_MSP

I2S_DTVSPDIF_HDMI

IO5+3.3V+8V

OUTPUT(AUDIO)

SPDIF_DTV

OPT_OUT

L OUTR OUT

IO8

A_NG_B

DCDETECTBLOCK

R_O

UT

+

R_O

UT

-

L_O

UT

-

L_O

UT

+

OTW

IO9

IO4

IO1

INPUT(VIDEO)AIR

INPUT3(AUDIO,CVBS)

HP

IO2

INPUT3(YPbPr)

LPF

SP TERMINAL

OPTICAL OUT

SUB WOOFER OUTAUDIO OUT

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5PC AUDIOAIR

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

39

5 6 7 8

4.14 50FHD LED and FHD IR ASSYS

FAN

FAN

FAN

FA3

FA4

FA5

M5

FA1

FH

D F

AN

CO

NN

EC

T A

SS

Y

DIG

ITA

L A

SS

YP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

UN

ITD1

1P8

P9

US

BF

AN

LED_

ONM

1M

3M

2M

21M

4

LED_

OFF

M11

50F

HD

LE

D A

SS

Y

MA

IN A

SS

Y

M15

M6

M8

M9

FH

D IR

AS

SY

FH

D R

LS

AS

SY

IO4

IO3

IO5

IO_A

UD

IO A

SS

Y

M33

C1

M34

C2

PO

D A

SS

Y

LED_

TIM

ER

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD40

1 2 3 4

4.15 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of FHD RLS and SIDE KEY ASSYS

FHD RLS ASSY

SIDE KEY ASSY

MAI

N AS

SY

CN97

81 OP AMPIC9781MM3012XN

V+3_3V_UCOM

RLSIC9782AMS114YD01

CN95

01 KEYS9501 to S9507

V+3_3V_STB

MAI

N AS

SY

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

41

5 6 7 8

5. DIAGNOSIS5.1 POWER SUPPLY OPERATION5.1.1 LED DISPLAY INFORMATION

LED Pattern

AC OFF or Main power switch OFF

Standby power management

Power ON

Power-down

Shutdown

Trap switch

No digital adjustmentdata copied for backup

In the process of rewriting the programof the microcomputer

During DTV Modulesoftware downloading

During factoryoperation

LED Pattern / RemarksLEDState

POWER ON STANDBY SLEEP

Blue

Red

Orange

Blue

Red

Orange

Blue

Red

Orange

Blue

Red

Orange

Blue

Red

Orange

Blue

Red

Orange

Blue

Red

Orange

Blue

Red

Orange

Blue

Red

Orange

Blue

Red

Orange

Downloading of DTVModule software is abnormally finished.

Downloading of DTVModule software is finished normally.

Blue

Red

Orange

Blue

Red

Orange

Once Twice n times

Lightins out

Lightins out

Lightins out

Lightins out

Lightins out

Lightins out

Lightins out

Lightins out

Lightins out

Lightins out

Lightins out

Lightins out

2.5 S

2.5 S

Always lighting

Always lighting

Always lighting

Always lighting

Always lighting

Once

Once Twice n times Once

500 mS

500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS

500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS 500 mS

500 mS

200 mS

100 mS

100 mS

100 mS

100 mS

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD42

1 2 3 4

5.1.2 POWER ON SEQUENCE

1 : The remote control (or KEY) signal is input to the IF microcomputer.2 : The IF microcomputer sends the operation data of the remote control unit (or KEY) to the main microcomputer.3 : The main microcomputer issues a startup command (PON) to the MOD microcomputer.4 : The relay is controlled with logical OR interpretation of control signals by the main microcomputer and module (MOD) microcomputer.

MOD Microcomputer

IC3151

MAIN Microcomputer

IC8401

IF Microcomputer

IC8301

Power MOD RELAY Control

REM

Inv. AmpQ9731

REM infrared receiver

Side Keys

SR OUT JackJA9404

4

1

21

SR_OUT

KEY_1KEY_2

TXD_MDRXD_MDREQ_MD

SR_IN

TXD_IFRXD_IFCE_IFREQ_IFBUSY_IF

Inv. AmpQ8302

Inv. AmpQ4105

3

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

43

5 6 7 8

5.1.3 DETAILS OF POWER ON SEQUENCE

Power supply status - Main switch off

Microcomputer output port state

Microcomputer input port state



ON

ON

Power supply

Main

Digital

Sensor

X/Y DriveScan

Address

I/O

Power supply

Main

Digital

Sensor

X/Y DriveScan

Address

I/O

Power supply status - AC off

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFFOFF

OFFOFFOFF

OFFOFF

OFFOFF

The user operation with the remote control unit is invalid. (All LED: OFF)Standby power device and some Vcc power devices operate.RGB-SW/AD/D-AMP/MAP are electrified, but uses the power-saving mode function of the IC.

IF: ACTIVEMain: PSW1Module: RELAYModule: DRF_B

Main: RST4Main: RST2Module: RST2

IF: ACTIVEOFFMain: RELAY2

Main: PSW1Module: RELAYModule: DRF_B


OR

LVDS-RxDAC

SQ ASIC

D-AMP

AND

ADDRESS

PSW1

AND

RELAY

RST2

RST4

ACTIVE

DRF_B

V+35VV+16.5VV+12VV+6.5VV+5.1V

VSUSVADR

PDET

AND

MainSwitch

AC

RST2

Jumper

MOD_RST RGB-SW

AD

ON OFF

AV-SWFAN

ASIC

RST3

M_SW_DET_B

M_SW_DET

AC_DET

P11

US_SW

A.TUNERD.TUNER

VBIBCM

iLinkAAC-DEC

GRUSB

MAP

A.D.TUNERCOFDEM

CIF

VDECHDMIASIC

LVDS-Tx

EMG_USB

MSP

A.D.TUNERA.TUNER

VBIBCMPOD

USB(Reg.)DLNA/USB(Elite)

MAP

Main_ucom

OR

LVDS-RxDAC

SQ ASIC

LED

DCDC/REG

DCDC/REG

DRIVE/SCAN

IR/Key/232C

DCDC/REG

AND

ADDRESS

DRIVE

PSW1

AND

RELAY

RST2

RST4

ACTIVE

DRF_B

V+3.3V_STBV+5.1V_STB

V+35VV+16.5VV+12VV+6.5VV+5.1V

VSUSVADR

PDET

AND

MainSwitch

AC

RST2

Jumper

MOD_RST RGB-SW

AD

ON OFF

AV-SWFAN

ASIC

RST3

M_SW_DET_B

M_SW_DET

AC_DET

P11

US_SW

A.TUNERD.TUNER

VBIBCM

iLinkAAC-DEC

GRUSB

A.D.TUNERCOFDEM

CIF

VDECHDMIASIC

LVDS-Tx

EMG_USB

A.D.TUNERA.TUNER

VBIBCMPOD


The state of AC cord is pulled out.

IR/Key/232C

LED

IF ucom

Short

EEPROM

SW

EEPROM

BAK_EEP

Module_ucom

Main_ucom

DCDC/REG

DCDC/REG

DCDC/REG

DCDC/REGDRIVE

M_SW_DET

STB

AC_DET

R


Relay

Vcc

VsusVadr

DRIVE/SCAN

Short

IF ucom

EEPROM

SW

EEPROM

BAK_EEP

Module_ucom

DCDC/REG

Vcc

VsusVadr

Relay

M_SW_DET

STB

AC_DET

R

D-AMP

MAPMSPMAP

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD44

1 2 3 4

Power supply status - ON





ONONONON

ONONON

ON

ON

Power supply

Main

Digital

Sensor

X/Y DriveScan

Address

I/O

Power supply

Main

Digital

Sensor

X/Y DriveScan

Address

I/O

Power supply status - Standby

OFFOFFOFF

OFFOFF

A state when it displays a picture on the PDP. (Blue LED: ON)All devices are electrified.

Remote control unit waiting state. (Red LED: ON)Standby power device and some Vcc power devices operate.RGB-SW/AD/D-AMP/MAP are electrified, but uses the power-saving mode function of the IC.



Main_ucom

Module_ucom

STB

OR

LVDS-RxDAC

SQ ASIC

LED

D-AMP

DCDC/REG

DRIVE/SCAN

IR/Key/232C

AND

ADDRESS

EEPROM

EEPROM PSW1

AND

RELAY

RST2

RST4

ACTIVE

DRF_B

V+35VV+16.5VV+12VV+6.5VV+5.1V

VSUSVADR

PDET

AND

MainSwitch

AC

RST2

Jumper

MOD_RST RGB-SW

AD

AC_DET

ON OFF

"PON"

AV-SWFAN

ASIC

RST3

M_SW_DET_B

M_SW_DET

AC_DET

SWP11

US_SW

A.TUNERD.TUNER

VBIBCM

iLinkAAC-DEC

GRUSB

MAP

A.D.TUNERCOFDEM

CIF

VDECHDMIASIC

LVDS-Tx

EMG_USB

MSP

A.D.TUNERA.TUNER

VBIBCMPOD


MAP



OR RelayLVDS-Rx

DACSQ ASIC

D-AMP

DCDC/REG

DCDC/REG

DRIVE/SCAN

IR/Key/232C

AND

ADDRESS

EEPROM PSW1

AND

RELAY

RST2

RST4

ACTIVE

DRF_B

DCDC/REG

V+35VV+16.5VV+12VV+6.5VV+5.1V

VSUSVADR

PDET

AND

MainSwitch

AC

RST2

Jumper

MOD_RST RGB-SW

AD

ON OFF

"POF"

AV-SWFAN

ASIC

RST3

M_SW_DET_B

M_SW_DET

AC_DET

SWP11

RUS_SW

A.TUNERD.TUNER

VBIBCM

iLinkAAC-DEC

GRUSB

MAP

A.D.TUNERCOFDEM

CIF

VDECHDMIASIC

LVDS-Tx

EMG_USB

MSP

A.D.TUNERA.TUNER

VBIBCMPOD


MAP

Short

IF ucom

DCDC/REGDRIVE

BAK_EEP

R

DCDC/REG

DCDC/REG

M_SW_DET

Relay

Vcc

VsusVadr


Short

IF ucom

Main_ucom

Module_ucom

BAK_EEP

EEPROM

DCDC/REGDRIVE

STB

AC_DET


M_SW_DET

Vcc

VsusVadr

LED

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

45

5 6 7 8

5.2 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART OF FAILURE ANALYSIS5.2.1 WHOLE UNIT

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Whole Unit

START

Is the STB LED lit? Is STB 3.3 V power supplied?(Check the power at the IF micro-computer on the MAIN Assy.)

Can the unit be turned on(Relay ON)?

Is the panel arbitrary turned on or off repeatedly? Or do luminescent spots appear on the screen?

Is the power shutdown?

A shutdown occurs. See "5.4 DIAGNOSE OF SD (SHUTDOWN)."

Are the voltages at AC_DET andMSW_DET on the POWER SUPPLY Unit high?

Replace the POWER SUPPLY Unit.

Check if the cable that connects the POWER SUPPLY and MAIN Assys is firmly connected.

If a module microcomputer does not set arelay in High, there is a possibility that a main microcomputer does not issue a command (PON).

A power-down will not be generated if the drive is off.

• Check the DRF SW.• Before turning the drive off with the RS-232C commands or using the remote control unit, turn the unit off.

In a case where luminescent spots appear or the panel is repeatedly turned on or off

In a case where luminescent spots appear

Is the voltage at the RELAY port of the connectors between the DIGITAL Assy and POWER SUPPLY Unit H (3.3 V)?

No

No

Is the drive off? Turn the drive on.

Is the abnormality associated with a single scan line?

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

A power-down occurs.

Does the screen display reset lighting?

Is there any local abnormality on the screen?

Is the abnormality associated with one ADDRESS or one TCP?

See "5.3 DIAGNOSE OF PD (POWER-DOWN)."Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

NG

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Problems concerning STB status

Note: Check that the Main power SW is ON side.

Problems concerning the power

Problems concerning lighting of the panel

Failure analysis for the MAIN Assy => MA1


Failure analysis for the POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS1



Failure analysis for the drive system => DR1




Yes

NoReplace the panel chassis.

A

The green LED on the DIGITAL Assy indicates ON/STB of the panel and causes for a power-down or shutdown. If neither the green nor red LED lights, it is likely that the power to the STB system is not supplied. (failure, PASV-STB status)

If AC_DET or MSW_DET is Low, LED goes off.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD46

1 2 3 4

Check with the animated slanting ramp mask.

Is the on-screen display (OSD) properly displayed?

Is the audio signal output?

Is the panel mask properly displayed?

No

No

Yes

Check on the Factory menu.

Is an external video signal displayed properly?

Specific failure whose cause is difficult to identify in the initial stage

No

No Failure analysis for the audio system => AU1

Yes

Yes

Yes

In the subsequent diagnostic steps, it is most likely that the multi base section is in failure.

Problems concerning video display

Problems concerning the audio output

A

Failure analysis for the DIGITAL Assy => DG1


A main microcomputer may stop in the statethat it hung a panel mute due to something.

Is it return to properly indication when a command (PMTS00) is issued?

No Failure analysis for the drive system => DR2

Yes Failure analysis for the MAIN Assy => MA4

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

47

5 6 7 8

5.2.2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The POWER SUPPLY Unit

Is the cable connected firmly to the P4 connector?

Is the cable to the P4 connector broken?

Check the voltage at the DIGITAL Assy and POWER SUPPLY Unit.

Check the resistance between C102 (lead nearest LF101) and the D105 anode, using a tester.

Properly connect the cable between the P4 and D23 connectors.

No

Replace the defective cable (J104).Yes

Yes

Yes

Is the cable connected firmly to the P9 connector?

Properly connect the cable between the P9 and M2 connectors.

No

Yes

Is the cable to the P9 connector broken?

Replace the defective cable (J106).

Is the fuse (F101) blown? Replace the POWER SUPPLY Unit.




Yes

No

No

Is one of the limiting resistors (R101/R102) blown?

Yes

No

The POWER SUPPLY Unit is normal.


STB 3.3 V power is not output.

No

Is the VADR voltage within the specified values?

Is the VSUS voltage within the specified range?

Is there a fluctuation in the VADR voltage?

Is there a fluctuation in the VSUS voltage?

The ripple must be within 5 V.

The ripple must be within 10 V.

The specified voltage values are between 57 and 63 V.

The specified voltage values are between 200 and 210 V (VSU: 125/35°C).

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

The cells of the panel do not light normally.

No


The power is not on, even though the RELAY port is active.

Is the relay (RY102) on?• Check the relay operation at the terminal (Pin 11 of P4). (Voltage: 3.3 V)• Check the relay sound (click).

No

Yes

Is the PFC voltage normal?• Check the voltage between the JW135 (PFC OUT) and JW112 (GND of primary side) terminal.• The voltage must be around 390 V.Caution: High voltage!





No

Yes




PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD48

1 2 3 4

5.2.3 DRIVE ASSY

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Drive Assy

X/Y DRIVE Assys

No

No No

NG

NGYes Yes

Yes

Are the FFC cables properly connected?

Are the panel FPC and SCAN Assysconnectors properly connected to the X/Y DRIVE Assys?

Is the input signal normal?

Replace the panel chassis.

Yes

Replace the X/Y DRIVE Assys.

NG

Replace the DIGITAL Assy.

Properly connect the panel FPCand SCAN Assys connectors.

Properly connect the FFC cables.

NoReplace the FFC cables.

Reset lighting is not displayed.

Is the waveform normal when the voltage is applied to the panel?


1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

49

5 6 7 8

No

Y DRIVE Assy

Is the waveform normal when the voltage is applied to the panel? (See the oscilloscope photos.)

Are all the connectors properly connected?

Reconnect the connectors.

NoSet the VH voltage correctly.

X DRIVE AssyY DRIVE Assy / SCAN A, B, C, DAssys

ADDRESS Assy

Abnormality across the whole screen, such as luminescent spots

B

D

C

NGYes

NoSet the VSNOFS voltage correctly.

NG

Is the VH set voltage (130 V) correctly set?

Yes

Is the VSNOFS set voltage correctly set (set value: designated for each panel)?

No

No

Another Assy may be in failure.

Set the VKNOFS 4voltage correctly.



Replace the Y DRIVE Assy.

Replace the SCAN IC.

NG

NG

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

NoSet the VYRST voltage correctly.Is the VYRST set voltage correctly

set (set value: designated for each panel)?

NGYes

NoSet the VKNOFS1, 2 voltage correctly.Is the VKNOFS1, 2 set voltage

correctly set?

NG

NG

Yes

Yes

NoSet the VKNOFS3 voltage correctly.Is the VKNOFS3 set voltage correctly

set (set value: designated for each panel)?

NGYes

Is the VKNOFS4 set voltage correctly set (set value: designated for each panel)?

Is the input signal normal?(See the oscilloscope photos.)

NoIs the waveform of the control signal from the SCAN Assy normal? (See the oscilloscope photos.)


Because it is difficult to identify which drive is in failure, follow the flowchart below to check each Assy.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD50

1 2 3 4

No

Is the waveform normal when the voltage is applied to the panel? (See the oscilloscope photos.)

Are all the connectors properly connected?


NoSet the VXKOFS1 voltage correctly.

B

D

NGYes

NG

Is the VXKOFS1 set voltage correctly set?

NoSet the VXKOFS2 voltage correctly.

Yes

Is the VXKOFS2 set voltage correctly set?

Yes

Another Assy may be in failure.

X DRIVE Assy


Replace the DIGITAL Assy.Replace the X DRIVE Assy.

NG

NGYes

Yes

Is the input signal normal? (See the oscilloscope photos.)

NoAre all the connectors properly connected?


No

C

NGYes

Is the TCP control signal normal? (See the oscilloscope photos.)

Yes

ADDRESS Assy



Yes No

NG

Replace the FFC cables.

Is the input signal normal? (See the oscilloscope photos.)

No

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

51

5 6 7 8

Is the TCP control signal normal?No

NG

NGYes Yes

NoAre the FFC cables properly connected?


Properly connect the FFC cables.

The abnormality is associated with one ADDRESS or one TCP?

Diagnose the ADDRESS Assy.

In most cases of damage on one line, the panel chassis must be replaced.

If the FFC cable that connects the DIGITAL and ADDRESS Assys is in failure, the abnormality is associated with one address in most cases.Replace the panel chassis.

No

NGYes

Yes

Yes

NoIs the Three pieces connectorconnected properly to the socket?

Reconnect the connector properly.

NG

Is the waveform of the SCAN IC control signal from the Y DRIVE Assy normal?

NoReplace the Y DRIVE Assy.

The abnormality is associated with a single scan line.

Diagnose the SCAN A, B, C and D Assys.

Replace the SCAN IC.




Is the waveform normal when the voltage is applied to the panel?

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD52

1 2 3 4

5.2.4 DIGITAL ASSY

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The DIGITAL Assy

Is V sync judgment detected by issuing the QSI command?

Is the sync signal properly output from the MAIN Assy?

Is the 50-pin FFC cable (J211) firmly connected?

Firmly connect the 50-pin FFC cable (J211).

If neither the V frequency nor H existence judgment is inappropriate, it is most likely that the output from the DIGITAL Assy is in free run and that the screen only displays reset lighting.(It is judged that the drive, POWER SUPPLY Unit and the panel are normal.)

When disconnecting the FFC cable, take care not to damage the CN3201 connector on the DIGITAL Assy, which can easily be damaged.

• If the OSD is not properly displayed although the panel mask is properly displayed, a failure exists in the path from the output of IC2801 on the MAIN Assy to IC3301 on the DIGITAL Assy. -> If only the OSD is abnormal, the MAIN Assy is in failure.

In a case of D11

It is most likely that the sync signal is abnormal.

It is most likely that the video signal data are missing.

DIGITAL : D11MAIN : M1

In a case of M1

No

No

No

No

No

No

Is the 50-pin FFC cable (J211) broken?

Is the FFC connector poorly contacted?

Replace the 50-pin FFC cable (J211).

No


Replace the MAIN Assy.



Is the indication position correct?

Is the tone correct?

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


The on-screen display (OSD) is not properly indicated.

Failure analysis for the DIGITAL Assy => DG1

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

53

5 6 7 8

5.2.5 MAIN ASSY

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The MAIN Assy

Failure in the RST IC (IC8302) output or its peripheral circuitsNoReplace the MAIN Assy.

NoTurn the POWER switch on.

The STB LED does not light although STB 3.3 V power is supplied.

Does the POWER switch on?

NoIs the M11 connector securely connected?

Securely connect the M11 connector.

Yes

Yes

Is the cable that is connected to the M11 connector broken? Replace the cable (J115).

No

No

No No

No

No

The RELAY port does not work. The power is not turned on.

Is voltage at REQ_IF on the MAINAssy High (3.3 V)?

Can the unit be turned on, using the remote control unit?

Can the unit be turned on, using the Power switch on the unit?

Can the unit be turned on, using RS-232C commands?

Yes

Yes

Is resetting of the IF microcomputer canceled?

Failure in the line between the IF microcomputer and M11 connector

Failure in the RS-232C driver and its peripheral circuits

Failure in the Main microcomputer.

NoReplace the MAIN Assy.

Yes

Is the voltage at Pin 3 of the M11 connector High?

Relay control is unable unless it supplies a power supply to the module microcompute.NoReplace the MAIN Assy.

NoTurn the POWER switch on.Does the POWER switch on?

Yes

Yes

Is the voltage at Pin 3 of the M1 connector 3.3 V?

• Failure in the output of REG IC (IC4501).• Is active low?


Yes

Are the voltages (3.3 V/2.5 V/1.5 V) supplied to the main microcomputer?

No problem with the MAIN Assy.Check the LED Assy.

No

Yes Yes

Yes

Replace the cable that connects between the IR and MAIN Assys.

Replace the cable that connects between the SIDE KEY and MAIN Assys.

Replace the IR Assy.

Replace the SIDE KEY Assy.





No

No



PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD54

1 2 3 4

5.2.6 VIDEO SYSTEM

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Video System

Is the selected input signal aterrestrial analog TV?

Are the data displayed on the "HDMI SIGNAL INFO" page of the Factory menu correct?

The source equipment previously used is in failure. No problem with the MAIN Assy.

Is the sync signal output from IC5201?

Does the result of SIG mode detection on the Factory menu coincide with the input signal data?

Yes

No

No

No

OK

After changing the source equipment, check the "HDMI SIGNAL INFO" data again.

NGReplace the MAIN Assy.


The input signal is not displayed.

=> TV

Is the selected input signal a composite signal?

Yes

No

=> COMP / S

=> PC

Is the selected input signal a component signal?

Yes => COMP / PC1

Is the selected input signal a S-video signal?

Is the selected input signal an PC signal?

Yes

No

Is the selected input signal an HDMI signal?

Yes

Yes

=> DTVIs the selected input signal a digital TV signal?

Yes

=> USB_E / USB_RIs the selected input signal a USB signal?

No problem with the MAIN Assy

Yes

No

NoYes

YesYes

Is the sync signal input to IC8001?No



Yes


No

No

No

=> COMP / S


1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

55

5 6 7 8

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Video System

Is the function correspondeing to selected signal input selected?

Select the corresponding signal with the Input selector.

No video from Composite or S-VIDEO

No

Disconnect component and confirm again.

No

Check the circuit between IC4601 and IC4801 and replace broken parts.

No

The panel is defective.No

Check around IC4601 and check the communications between IC4601 and microcomuputer. If there was no ploblem replace IC4601.

No

Check around the IC that is found to have failure in communication and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace MAIN Assy

No

No

No

Replace the TANSHI Assy.


NG

Check the flexible cable between CN8804 and CN4004.Check the flexible cable between CN8803 and CN4001.

NoReplace or reconnect flexible cable.

NG

Yes

Yes

Image for the composite or S-videosignal is not displayed.

=> COMP/S

Is the compornent cable is connect to jack? (Input1 to Input3)

Has the signal arrived at IC4601?(pins 85, 91, 72)

Yes

Which signal is not output,main or sub signal?

Is a signal output from IC4601?(pins 42, 45)

Yes

Has the signal arrived at IC4801?(pins 22, 26)

Yes

Has the symptom been settled when the MAIN Assy is replaced?

Yes

Yes

Is the communication between each IC on the MAIN Assy and the microcomputer normal?

Yes

Has the signal arrived at IC4801?(pin 70)

Yes

MAIN

SUB

1

4

8

Is a signal output from IC4601?(pin 49)

5

6

3

7

1 IC4601 - pins 85, 91, 72V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

2 IC4701 - pin 57V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

3 IC4601 - pin 42 (S-video)V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

4 4IC4601 - pin 45 (Composite)V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

IC4601 - pin 45 (S-video)V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

5 IC4601 - pin 49 (Composite)V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div





WaveformsInput signal: Color-bar

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD56

1 2 3 4

Is the input selecter set to TV?(ANT-A or B)

Set the Input selector to TV.(ANT-A or B)

No

Check around the FE and check the communications between FE and microcomuputer. If there was no ploblem replace MAIN Assy.

No


No


Check around IC4601 and check the communications between IC4601 and microcomuputer.If there was no ploblem replace IC4601.

No

Check around the IC that is found to have failure in communication and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace MAIN Assy.

No

No

No


Yes

Yes

TV signal is not displayed on the screen.

=> TV

Is a signal output normally from the FE to IC4601?(pins 55, 57)

Yes

Which signal is not output,main or sub signal?


Has the signal arrived at IC4801?(pins 22, 26)

Yes


Yes

Yes

Is the communication between each IC on the MAIN Assy and the microcomputer normal?

Yes

Has the signal arrived at IC4801?(pin 70)

Yes

MAIN

SUB

2

4

8

Is a signal output from IC4601?(pin 49)

5

6

3

7

No video from TV signal

2 IC4601 - pin 57V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div










1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

57

5 6 7 8

Is the function corresponding to selected signal input selected?

Select the corresponding signal with the input selector.

No

Replace flexible cable.NoCheck the communication between

the CN8804 and CN4004 or between CN8803 and CN4001 or around of jack.

No


No


Check around IC4701 and check the communications between IC4701 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace IC4701.

No

Check around the IC that is found to have a failure in communication and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace MAIN Assy.

No


Yes

Yes

Image for the component signals is not displayed.

=> COMP/PC1

Has the signal arrived at IC4701 ?

Yes

Is a signal output from IC4701? (pins 30, 32, 34)

Has the signal arrived at IC5001? (pins 43, 48, 54)

Yes


Yes

Yes

Is the communication between each IC on the MAIN Assy and the microcomputer nomal?

Yes

15

18

1413

1716

13 IC4701 - pin 30 (component_PR)V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

13 IC4701 - pin 30 (PC_R)V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

15 IC4701 - pin 34 (component_Y)V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

15 IC4701 - pin 34 (PC_G)V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

17 IC5001 - pin 48 (component)V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

17 IC5001 - pin 48 (PC)V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div

14 IC4701 - pin 32 (component_Pb)V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div

14 IC4701 - pin 32 (PC_B)V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div






PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD58

1 2 3 4

Is the function corresponding to selected signal input selected?

Select the corresponding signal with the input selector.

No

Check the communication between the CN4701 and around IC4901.

No


No


Check around IC4701 and check the communications between IC4701 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace IC4701.

No

Check around the IC that is found to have a failure in communication and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace MAIN Assy.

No


Yes

Yes

Image for the PC signal is not displayed.

=> PC

Has the signal arrived at IC4701?(pins 30, 32, 34)

Yes

Is a signal output from IC4701? (pin 41, 43, 45)

Has the signal arrived at IC5001? (pin 43, 48, 54)

Yes


Yes

Yes

Is the communication between each IC on the MAIN Assy and the microcomputer nomal?

Yes

15

18

1413

121110

1716

13 IC4701 - pin 30 (component_PR)V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div


15 IC4701 - pin 34 (component_Y)V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div




14 IC4701 - pin 32 (component_Pb)V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div










1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

59

5 6 7 8

Is the power-supply voltage of CN4105 normal?

Check between CN4105 and P8 (POWER SUPPLY Unit).

No

Check between IC6401 and IC8001. Exchange IC6401 if there is no problem.

No

Check between IC8401 (pins 52,53) and IC6401 (pins 385, 466). Exchange IC6301.

No NGReplace the MAIN Assy.

Yes

Is the signal from IC6401 to IC8001?

Yes


Yes

When power ON, is RESET_DT(IC8401 - pin 60) Low after D+3.3 V standing up?

Check around IC6902.No


Yes

Do you communicate by TXD_DT(IC8401: pin 53) and RXDDT(IC8401: pin 52)?

Yes

Yes

DTV (Digital Terrestrial Video) is not displayed.

=> DTV

Finishing troubleshooting.

Has the function is selected Home Media Gallery by Home menu?

Select the input of specification by the input switch.

Has USB memory or digital camerra is connected to USB connecter?

No

Insert USB device such as USB flash memory.

NG

NG

No

Check between IC6401 and IC8001. If there is no problem then replace IC6401.

No

The panel is defective.

Check around USB connecter or USB cable and check between pins 2, 3 of CN4110 and pins 302, 391 of IC6401.

No

No


Replace USB cable.

Yes

Yes

The image of the USB card doesn't come out.

=> USB_R

Is the contents list are appear?

Yes

Has the signal come to IC6401?

Is the signal from IC6401 to IC8001?

Yes

Yes


Yes

No video from USB input

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD60

1 2 3 4

5.2.7 AUDIO SYSTEM

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Has the sound been emitted from the speakers?

Yes

Has the sound been emitted from the Audio out terminal?

Sound of all functions does not output?

Yes

Yes

Check the speakers and speaker cables. Is it no problem?

=> AU1

Is sound muting set?

Is the volume set to 0?

Is not headphone inserted?

Go to .

No

No Check the cables (CN8806) from the main power and peripheral circuit.Repair the failure points.

Pull out headphone, then check again.

Replace the speakers or speakercables.

Cancel muting, then check again.

Yes

Yes

Raise the volume, then check again.

Is a voltage (+16.5 V) supplied toIC9201?

Yes

No Check the CN9251 and peripheral circuit. Repair the failure points.

Is not a signal output from CN9251? (pins 2, 4, 5, 7)

Yes

Check the IC9181 and peripheral circuit. Repair the failure points.

Is a 12 V output from +12V_Reg output of IC9181 normal?

Yes

Check the peripheral circuits and the communication with the microcomputer and clock output of X9101. If there was no ploblem replace the MAP5601M.

Are signals input to IC9151? (pins 2, 3, 5, 6)

Yes

Check the IC9151 and peripheral circuit. Repair the failure points.

Are signals output from IC9151?(pins 1, 7)

No Check between the LPF (L9255, L9256) and CN9251. Repair the failure points.

Is not a PWM signal output from IC9201? (pins 34, 38, 46, 50)

Yes

Yes

No Check between the input terminals and IC9101. Repair the failure points.

Check the peripheral circuits and the communication with the microcomputer and clock output of X9101. If there was no ploblem replace the MAP5601M.

Is a signal input to IC9101?(pins 24, 25)

No

No

Has I2C communication signalarrived at IC9101?

B

A

Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Audio System

42 43

44 45

No Check around the IC9101. Repair the failure points.

Is not a PWM signal output from IC9101? (pins 52, 53, 54, 55)

Yes

46 47

49 50

48

51

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

61

5 6 7 8

No

No YesHas the sound been emitted from the Headphones?

Is sound muting set?

Is the volume set to 0?

No

Check the communications around the IC8871 and between the IC8871 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem, replace BH3544F.

Cancel muting, then check again.

YesRaise the volume, then check again.


No

Yes

No

Check around the IC9101 and repair the failure points.


Yes

Replace the cables or SIDE IO Assy.NGCheck the cables between CN8801

and CN9351 or check around the Headphones jack.

B

42 43

47 48

WaveformsInput signal: L/R 1 kHz, 0.5 Vrms (VOL 30)

44

49

45

50

46

51

52

53

CN9251 - pins 2, 4V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div

IC9101 - pins 54, 55V: 2 V/div H: 5 μS/div

CN9251 - pins 5, 7V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div

IC9101 - pins 24, 25V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div

52 53IC9101 - pins 38, 39V: 1 V/div H: 1 mS/div







IC9151 - pin 1, etc.V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD62

1 2 3 4

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

NoHas the sound of the Analog broadcasting output?

Is a signal input to IC9101?(pins 28, 29)

Check the communications around the IC9101 and between the IC9101 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem, replace MAP5601M.

Check the communications between the IC6001 and the microcomputerand between the IC6001 and IC9101.

NG Replace the IC6001 and repair the failure points.

Yes

No No

No

No

Has the sound of the HDMIoutput?

Is a SPDIF signal output from IC5201? (pin 78)

Check the communications around the IC9101 and between the IC9101 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem, replace MAP5601M.

Check the FFC and cables between the MAIN Assy and TANSHI Assy. Does not sound output even if replace them?

Poor contact of the connector or FFC, or cable is defective.Replace FFC or cable.

Replace the IC5201.

Yes

Yes Yes

No

Poor contact of the connector or FFC, or cable is defective.Replace FFC or cable.

Yes

No

Has the sound of the Digital broadcasting output?

Yes

NoHas the sound of the Analog RCAand PC inputs output?

Is a I2S signal input to IC9101?(pins 100 to 102)

Yes

Is a SPDIF signal input to IC9101? (pin 4)

Check the communications around the IC9101 and between the IC9101 and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace the MAIN Assy.

Is a signal output from IC8401 of the MAIN Assy?

NoRepare the DTB block.

Check around IC8401 and repair the failure points.

Check between input terminal andIC9101 and repair the failure points.

Yes

Yes

NoIs a signal input to IC9101?(pins 24 to 27, 32 to 37)



Check between IC9101 and CN8801 and repair the failure points.

NoIs a signal input to IC9101?(pins 30, 31)

A

NoHas the sound of the side input output?

Replace the cables.NG

Check the cables between CN8801 and CN9351, and check around the pin jack.

OK

54

Waveforms

55 56 57IC5201 - pin 78V: 1 V/div H: 1 μS/div

IC9101 - pin 106V: 1 V/div H: 10 μS/div



Input signal: L/R 1 kHz, 0.5 Vrms (VOL 30)

54

54

5756

5049

5049

55

NGCheck that the HDMI switch of the MENU is properly set.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

63

5 6 7 8

5.3 DIAGNOSIS OF PD (POWER-DOWN)5.3.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER-DOWN SIGNAL

Block Diagram of the Power-Down Signal

SSS

OR

AD

DR

ES

S S

AS

SY

DIG

ITA

L A

SS

Y

PO

WE

R S

UP

PLY

UN

IT

X D

RIV

EA

SS

Y

Y D

RIV

EA

SS

Y

Rel

ayC

ontr

ol

Pro

tect

ion

Circ

uit

Mod

ule

Mic

roco

mpu

ter

PD

MU

TE

Circ

uit

YS

US

_PD

YD

D_P

D

YD

RV

_PD

SC

N5V

_PD

SC

AN

_PD

XD

RV

_PD

XD

D_P

D

XS

US

_PD

AD

R_P

D1

DIG

I_D

CD

C_P

D

DR

F_S

W

DR

F_S

W

PD

_MU

TE

_B

PS

_PDE

XT

_PD

PD

_TR

IG_BD

23

IC36

04

12IC38

01D

CD

CC

onve

rter

IC36

01D36

01to

D36

05,

D36

08,

D36

12

D35

01to

D35

04

D13

to D

20

D22

D21

Y1

Y1

X1

AD

1A

D1

No

te:

The

figu

res �

to �

indi

cate

the

num

ber

oftim

es th

e LE

D fl

ashe

s w

hen

pow

er-d

own

occu

rs in

the

corr

espo

ndin

g ro

ute.

OR

SS

AD

DR

ES

S L

AS

SY

AD

1A

D1

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD64

1 2 3 4

5.3.2 PD (POWER-DOWN) DIAGNOSIS OF FAILURE ANALYSIS

Connectors disconnection detection

Q1219 to Q1224

Q2217 to Q2224

Q1218 to Q1224,Q1226

Q2217 to Q2224

IC2601,IC2603,D2604

Q2320 to Q2325,Q2330,Q2332,Q2334

Q2320 to Q2325,Q2330,Q2332,Q2334

Q2320 to Q2325,Q2330,Q2332,Q2334

Q2320 to Q2325,Q2330,Q2332,Q2334

Red LEDFlashing

Count

OperatingPD

Defective Assy PD Outline Checkpoint Possible Defective Part Remarks

2 POWER

POWER SUPPLY Unit

POWER SUPPLY Unit

X DRIVE AssyVSUS UVP

Failure in the POWER SUPPLY Unit

X SUS BLOCKVSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT-SUSGND are short-circuited.

Y DRIVE Assy Y SUS BLOCK VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT-SUSGND are short-circuited.

VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT-SUSGND are short-circuited.

VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT-SUSGND are short-circuited.3 SCAN

SCAN Assy

VH UVP

SCAN IC SCAN IC

X DRIVE Assy X SUS BLOCK

Y DRIVE Assy

Y SUS BLOCK

VH DC/DC converter


CN2001,CN2301

DIGITAL Assy CN3509

4 SCN-5VSCAN Assy

CN2801,CN2901,CN2902,CN3001,CN3002,CN3101

SCAN ICIC5V UVP

IC5V DC/DC Q2764,D2768,R2764

SCAN IC

Y DRIVE Assy

6 Y-DCDC Y DRIVE Assy

VNOFS UVP Y MSK BLOCK LMSK is short-circuited.

VNOFS DC/DC D2606,Q2709,Q2710

Vprst UVP YPRST Regulator Q2604,Q2605,IC2602

15VDD UVP 15VDC/DC Q2662,R2669

VKOFS1_2 UVP Y MSK BLOCK LMSK is short-circuited.

VKOFS1_2 Regulator Q2705,Q2702

VKOFS3 UVP Y MSK BLOCK LMSK is short-circuited.

VKOFS3 Regulator Q2706,Q2703

VKOFS4 UVP Y MSK BLOCK LMSK is short-circuited.

EXT_PD line: Open

EXT_PD line: Open

It becomes "UNKNOW" except above-mentioned PD detection condition.

VKOFS4 Regulator Q2707,Q2704

7 Y-SUS Y DRIVE Assy Center electric potential detection PD

Y RESONANCE BLOCK Q2106 to Q2109,Q2111,Q2113,D2104 to D2107

8 ADRS

ADDRESS Assy

ADDRESS RESONACE BLOCKVADR UVP

TCPVADR UVP

CN1601,CN1602,CN1801,CN1802

CN3501 to CN3508

CN1202 to CN1206

CN2302 to CN2306


DIGITAL Assy

X DRIVE Assy

Y DRIVE Assy

9 XDRIVEX DRIVE Assy Connectors

disconnection detection

CN1001

DIGITAL Assy CN3510

P4

CN3801

Each PD line of ModuleUcomModuleUcom can notdetection

10 X-DCDC X DRIVE Assy




CN1201

15VDD UVPX SUS BLOCK L1201,R1217

15VDC/DC Q1402

VXKOFS1 UVPVXKOFS1 Regulator Q1405,Q1406

X OFFSET BLOCK Q1302,Q1304

VXKOFS2 UVPVXKOFS2 Regulator Q1403,Q1404

X OFFSET BLOCK Q1301,Q1303

11 X-SUS X DRIVE Assy Center electric potential detection PD X RESONANCE BLOCK Q1108,Q1116,Q1112,Q1119

12

15

DIG-DCDC

UNKNOW

DIGITAL Assy

DIGITAL Assy

3.3V, 2.5V, 1.1VUVP, OVP, OCP

5.1V OCP

Abnormality in the DC-DC convertercontrol IC

Periphery of the DC-DC converter

Abnormality in 5.1V input(include abnormality in the protection fuse)

IC3801

FU3801

Q3841, Q3861, Q3881L3841, L3861, L3881R3820, R3848, R3868, R3888

UVP: Under Voltage Protect , OVP: Over Voltage Protect

Prediction of failure symptoms when a PD (power-down) is generated

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

65

5 6 7 8

How to distinguish which connector is disconnected

Assy ConnectorTo which Assy the Connector

is ConnectedLED Flashing Count Screen Display

X DRIVE Assy

CN1001 DIGITAL Assy 5 (XDRIVE)CN1201 Black screenPOWER SUPPLY Unit (drive system power)CN1202 POWER SUPPLY Unit (ADR system power) 8 (ADRS)

CN1203 ADDRESS Assy 8 (ADRS)

Y DRIVE Assy

CN2001 DIGITAL Assy 3 (SCAN)CN2301 POWER SUPPLY Unit (drive system power) 3 (SCAN)CN2302 POWER SUPPLY Unit (ADR system power) 8 (ADR)CN2303 to CN2306

ADDRESS Assy 8 (ADR)

CN2501,CN2502

CN2801, CN2902CN3002, CN3101

SCAN A, B, C, D Assy


4 (SCN-5V)


CN2901, CN3001 Y DRIVE Assy4 (SCN-5V)

ADDRESS AssyCN1602, CN1802 DIGITAL Assy 8 (ADRS)

CN1601, CN1801 X DRIVE Assy,Y DRIVE Assy

8 (ADRS)

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD66

1 2 3 4

Resonance centerelectric potential 1

Resonance centerelectric potential

X_CN

15VDD

XSUS_PD

XDRV_PD

XDD_PD

X Drive PD system

Y Drive PD system

IC5V

SCAN HiUnconnect

SCAN LowUnconnect

VH SCAN_PD

SCN5V_PD

YSUS_PD

Increase or decreasevoltage detection


Decrease voltagedetection

DCDC converterdrive stop


Resonance centerelectric potential 2



FFCdisconnectiondetection

YDRV_PD

VXKOFS1 Decrease voltagedetection

VXKOFS2 Decrease voltagedetection

15VDD Decrease voltagedetection

VPRST Decrease voltagedetection

YDD_PDVKOFS1_2 Decrease voltage

detection

VNOFS

VKOFS3

VKOFS4

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

67

5 6 7 8

5.4 DIAGNOSIS OF SD (SHUTDOWN)5.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE SHUTDOWN SIGNAL

Block Diagram of the Shutdown SignalN

ote

: T

he fi

gure

s 1

to f

indi

cate

the

num

ber

of ti

mes

the

L

ED

flas

hes

whe

n sh

ut-d

own

occu

rs in

the

corr

espo

ndin

g

rout

e.

MA

IN A

SS

Y

3-w

ire s

eria

l

Sta

tus

notic

e lin

e

TA

NS

HI A

SS

Y

PA

NE

L S

EN

SO

R A

SS

Y

DIG

ITA

L A

SS

Y

158

8

8

8

8

12

12 12 12

12

11 10 10

5

5 97

7

1313

4

1

1

1 1

1

3

2

2

BU

S

I2C

UA

RT

TH

9091

Tem

p. s

enso

r

IC80

01M

ULT

I_LS

I

FA

N N

G1

TE

MP

2

IC91

01M

SP

IO3

M6

M4

M9

M1

A_N

G_B

RS

T4

RS

T2

Inte

rnal

FA

N

Ext

erna

lF

AN

IC92

01D

-Am

p IO4

IC48

01V

DE

C

SC

L_A

VS

DA

_AV

SC

L_A

V5

SD

A_A

V5

SC

L_M

AS

DA

_M

IC50

01A

DC

IC52

01H

DM

I_R

XIC

8404

EE

PR

OM

U60

01A

-FE

IC46

01A

V S

WIC

4701

RG

B S

W

SC

L_M

BS

DA

_M

IC83

01

IF_U

CO

M

MO

DU

LE

_UC

OM

EM

MA

2_U

CO

M

OT

WAN

T_PO

W_D

E

V+

12V

V+

6_5V

V+

5_1V

IC44

033c

hDC

-

EMG_

DDC

IC84

06A

ND

-Gat

e

IC84

06A

ND

-Gat

e

V+

3_3V

_D4 EM

G_US

B

IC60

01M

PX

U61

01A

D-F

E

IC63

01B

CM

3517

IC64

01B

CM

7038

TX

D_D

TR

XD

_DT

IC73

02PO

D In

terfa

ce

IC69

03E

EP

RO

M

IC70

01T

V-G

slic

er

FA

N N

G2

M5

D11

IC33

01S

Q_L

SI

IC36

07M

ON

OM

ULT

I

IC38

053.

3V_R

ST

_IC

IC36

02E

EP

RO

M

IC39

01S

EN

SO

R

IC39

02E

EP

RO

M

IC36

05D

AC

1

RS

T2

SQ

_NO

N

TE

MP

SC

LS

DA

E_SC

LE_

SDA

D23

TE

1

PS

IZE

IC36

06D

AC

2

STOP

_SQ FU

3801

5.1V

_FU

SE

IC38

013.

3V_D

DC

ON

MO

DE

L

2 =

>1

SW

5V ⇔

3.3

VC

onve

rter

TX

D_I

FR

XD

_IF

CLK

_IF

BU

SY

_IF

CE

_IF

RE

Q_I

F

TX

D_M

DR

XD

_MD

RE

Q_M

D

TX

D_I

C3

RX

D_I

C3

RE

Q_I

C3

IC84

01

US

B P

ower

OV

P B

lock

IC36

01

TXD_

SQRX

D_SQ

CLK_

SQCE

_SQ

BUSY

_SQ

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD68

1 2 3 4

5.4.2 SD (SHUTDOWN) DIAGNOSISFr

eque

ncy

of

LED

Flas

hing

Maj

or T

ype

Det

aile

d T

ype

Log

Indi

catio

n in

Fac

tory

Mod

eC

hec

kpo

int

Po

ssib

le D

efec

tive

P

art

Rem

arks

MA

INS

UB

Blu

e 1

Abn

orm

ality

in th

e S

eque

nce

LSI

Com

mun

icat

ion

erro

r

SQ

-LS

I

RT

RY

CLK

_SQ

/TX

D_S

Q, e

tc.

IC33

01, I

C36

01S

Q_I

C c

omm

unic

atio

n no

t est

ablis

hed.

IC33

01 m

ay n

ot h

ave

prop

erly

sta

rted

up.

Driv

e st

opS

QN

OC

heck

if th

e vi

deo

sync

sig

nal i

s in

put t

o IC

3301

.C

N32

01, I

C32

02, I

C33

01A

shutd

own o

ccurs

if IC

3301

has n

ot pro

perly

start

ed up

(a co

mmun

icatio

n fail

ure be

twee

n IC3

301 a

nd IC

3302

[FLA

SH]).

Bus

yB

US

YB

US

Y_S

QIC

3301

, IC

3601

If B

US

Y_S

Q r

emai

ns h

igh,

a s

hutd

own

is g

ener

ated

.

Inco

here

nt v

ersi

on(h

ardw

are,

sof

twar

e)V

ER

-HS

Che

ck th

e m

odel

num

ber

of th

e D

IGIT

AL

Ass

y an

d th

e de

stin

atio

n of

the

sequ

ence

LS

I.IC

3302

, IC

3601

The

writ

ten

SE

Q_P

RO

G is

inco

here

nt w

ith d

ata

on th

e D

IGIT

AL

Ass

y.

Inco

here

nt v

ersi

on(m

emor

y, s

oftw

are)

VE

R-M

SC

heck

the

mod

el n

umbe

r of

the

DIG

ITA

L A

ssy

and

the

dest

inat

ion

of th

e se

quen

ce L

SI.

IC33

02, I

C36

01, I

C36

02A

shu

tdow

n oc

curs

if th

e S

EQ

-PR

OG

that

has

bee

n st

ored

in b

acku

p m

emor

y do

es n

ot c

oinc

ide

with

the

actu

al S

EQ

-PR

OG

.

Blu

e 2

Failu

re in

IIC

co

mm

unic

atio

n w

ith th

e m

odul

e m

icro

com

pute

r

DIG

ITA

L A

ssy

EE

PR

OM

MD

-IIC

EE

PR

OM

IIC c

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e of

IC36

02IC

3602

, IC

3601

Che

ck th

e pu

ll-up

resi

stor

of t

he II

C c

ontro

l lin

e an

d th

e po

wer

to th

e co

rres

pond

ing

IC.

PAN

EL

SE

NS

OR

Ass

y E

EP

RO

MB

AC

KU

PIIC

com

mun

icat

ion

line

of IC

3902

PANE

L SE

NSOR

Ass

y (IC

3902

), IC

3601

Che

ck th

e pu

ll-up

resi

stor

of t

he II

C c

ontro

l lin

e an

d th

e po

wer

to th

e co

rres

pond

ing

IC.

DA

C1

DA

C1

IIC c

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e of

IC36

05IC

3605

, IC

3601

Che

ck th

e pu

ll-up

resi

stor

of t

he II

C c

ontro

l lin

e an

d th

e po

wer

to th

e co

rres

pond

ing

IC.

DA

C2

DA

C2

IIC c

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e of

IC36

06IC

3606

, IC

3601

Che

ck th

e pu

ll-up

resi

stor

of t

he II

C c

ontro

l lin

e an

d th

e po

wer

to th

e co

rres

pond

ing

IC.

Blu

e 3

Abn

orm

ality

in R

ST

2 po

wer

dec

reas

e–

RS

T2

–Is

the

outp

ut v

olta

ge (3

.3 V

) of t

he D

C-D

C c

onve

rter

low

?T

P38

81, T

P38

82If

RST2

doe

s not

bec

ome

high

afte

r the

unit

is tu

rned

on,

a sh

utdo

wn w

ill be

gen

erat

ed in

seve

ral s

econ

ds.

The

5.1

V p

ower

is n

ot o

utpu

t.PO

WER

SUP

PLY

Unit,

FU38

01Ch

eck

if V

+ 5.

1 V

is st

arte

d. A

lso c

heck

if th

e FU

3801

on

the

DIG

ITAL

Ass

y ha

s be

en m

elte

d.

Blu

e 4

Abn

orm

ality

in p

anel

te

mpe

ratu

re–

TM

P-N

GT

MP

-H

TM

P-L

Hig

h te

mpe

ratu

re a

bnor

mal

ity in

the

pane

l tem

pera

ture

sen

sor

If TE

MP1

that

is re

ad b

y th

e m

odul

e m

icroc

ompu

ter i

s 85

°C o

r hig

her,

a sh

utdo

wn w

ill be

gen

erat

ed.

Low

tem

pera

ture

abn

orm

ality

in th

e pa

nel t

empe

ratu

re s

enso

rPA

NEL

SENS

OR A

ssy (

IC39

01)

PANE

L SE

NSOR

Ass

y (IC

3901

)

A s

hutd

own

occu

rs if

the

read

ing

of T

EM

P1

dete

cted

by

the

mod

ule

mic

roco

mpu

ter i

s –2

0°C

or l

ess.

Als

o ch

eck

the

conn

ectio

n w

ith th

e PA

NE

L S

EN

SO

R A

ssy.

Blu

e 5

Sho

rt-c

ircui

ting

of th

e sp

eake

rs /

D-A

MP

te

mpe

ratu

re a

bnor

mal

ity–

AU

DIO

–S

peak

er te

rmin

als

JA93

01C

heck

if a

ny s

peak

er c

able

is in

con

tact

with

the

chas

sis.

AU

DIO

_AM

PIC

9201

, IC

9101

Che

ck if

the

AM

P o

utpu

t is

shor

t-ci

rcui

ted.

Perip

hery

of t

he c

able

bet

wee

n IO

3 an

d M

8, a

nd IO

6 an

d P5

CN88

03,C

N400

1,CN

8806

,P5

Che

ck if

cab

les

are

firm

ly c

onne

cted

.

Blu

e 6

Failu

re in

com

mun

icat

ion

with

th

e m

odul

e m

icro

com

pute

r–

MO

DU

LE–

Com

mun

icat

ion

line

betw

een

MA

IN a

nd M

OD

IC31

51, I

C84

01C

heck

the

com

mun

icat

ion

lines

(T

XD

_MO

D/R

XD

_MO

D/R

EQ

_MO

D).

Per

iphe

ry o

f the

cab

le b

etw

een

D11

and

M1

CN

3001

, CN

4101

Che

ck if

cab

les

are

firm

ly c

onne

cted

.

Blu

e 7

Failu

re in

mai

n m

icro

com

pute

r 3-

wire

se

rial c

omm

unic

atio

n

IF m

icro

com

pute

rM

A-3

LIF

Com

mun

icat

ion

line

betw

een

IF a

nd M

AIN

IC83

01, I

C84

01C

heck

the

com

mun

icat

ion

lines

(TX

D_I

F/R

XD

_IF/

CLK

_IF/

BU

SY

_IF/

CE

_IF/

RE

Q_I

F).

MU

LTI p

roce

ssor

MU

LTI

Com

mun

icat

ion

line

betw

een

MU

LTI a

nd M

AIN

IC80

01, I

C84

01C

heck

the

com

mun

icat

ion

lines

(T

XD

_IC

3/R

XD

_IC

3).

Blu

e 8

Failu

re in

IIC

co

mm

unic

atio

n w

ith th

e m

ain

mic

roco

mpu

ter

Tune

r 1

MA

-IIC

FE

1IIC

com

mun

icat

ion

line

betw

een

Tune

r (A

NT-

A) a

nd M

AIN

U61

01,IC

8401

Che

ck th

e co

mm

unic

atio

n lin

es (

SC

L_T

U/S

DA

_TU

or

SC

L_A

V5/

SD

A_A

V5)

.

AV

sw

itch

AV

-SW

IIC c

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e be

twee

n A

V-S

W a

nd M

AIN

IC46

01, I

C84

01C

heck

the

com

mun

icat

ion

lines

(S

CL_

AV

5/S

DA

_AV

5).

RG

B s

witc

hR

GB

-SW

IIC c

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e be

twee

n R

GB

-SW

and

MA

INIC

4701

, IC

8401

Che

ck th

e co

mm

unic

atio

n lin

es (

SC

L_A

V5/

SD

A_A

V5)

.

Mai

n V

DE

CV

DE

CIIC

com

mun

icat

ion

line

betw

een

M-V

DE

C a

nd M

AIN

IC48

01, I

C84

01C

heck

the

com

mun

icat

ion

lines

(S

CL_

MB

/SD

A_M

B).

VD

EC

SD

RA

MS

DR

AM

IIC c

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e be

twee

n V

DE

C a

nd S

DR

AM

IC48

01, I

C48

02C

heck

the

com

mun

icat

ion

lines

(S

DR

AM

). D

efec

tive

SD

RA

M

AD

/PLL

AD

CIIC

com

mun

icat

ion

line

betw

een

AD

C a

nd M

AIN

IC50

01, I

C84

01C

heck

the

com

mun

icat

ion

lines

(S

CL_

AV

/SD

A_A

V).

HD

MI

HD

MI

IIC c

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e be

twee

n H

DM

I_R

X a

nd M

AIN

IC52

01, I

C84

01C

heck

the

com

mun

icat

ion

lines

(S

CL_

MB

/SD

A_M

B).

Tune

r 2

FE

2IIC

com

mun

icat

ion

line

betw

een

Tune

r (A

NT-

B) a

nd M

AIN

U60

01, I

C84

01C

heck

the

com

mun

icat

ion

lines

(S

CL_

AV

5/S

DA

_AV

5).

US

-MS

PU

S-M

SP

IIC c

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e be

twee

n U

S_M

SP

and

MA

INIC

6001

, IC

8401

Che

ck th

e co

mm

unic

atio

n lin

es (

SC

L_A

V5/

SD

A_A

V5)

.

Che

ck th

e co

mm

unic

atio

n lin

es (T

XD

_IF/

RX

D_I

F/C

LK_I

F/B

US

Y_I

F/C

E_I

F/R

EQ

_IF)

.B

lue

9Fa

ilure

in c

omm

unic

atio

n w

ith th

e m

ain

mic

roco

mpu

ter

MA

IN–

FAN

1

FAN

2

–C

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e be

twee

n IF

and

MA

INIC

8301

, IC

8401

Blu

e 10

FAN

NG

FAN

Dir

t atta

ched

to th

e fa

n m

otor

–C

heck

the

fan.

(SD

10 d

oes

not d

etec

t it a

t the

tem

pera

ture

that

fans

do

not t

urn.

)P

erip

hery

of t

he F

HD

FA

N C

ON

NE

CT

FHD

FAN

CONN

ECT

Assy

FAN

NG

Che

ck if

cab

les

are

firm

ly c

onne

cted

.Pe

riphe

ry o

f the

cable

bet

ween

FA1

and

M5,

FAN

and

M4,

and

FA2

and

FA5

CN95

51 to

CN9

555,

CN41

08

Dir

t atta

ched

to th

e fa

n m

otor

–C

heck

the

fan.

(SD

10 d

oes

not d

etec

t it a

t the

tem

pera

ture

that

a fa

n do

es n

ot tu

rn.)

Per

iphe

ry o

f the

cab

le b

etw

een

FAN

and

M4

CN

4103

Che

ck if

cab

les

are

firm

ly c

onne

cted

.C

heck

that

the

volta

ge o

utpu

ts it

.P

erip

hery

of t

he fa

n co

ntro

l reg

ulat

orIC

4310

Per

iphe

ry o

f the

fan

cont

rol r

egul

ator

IC43

03C

heck

that

the

volta

ge o

utpu

ts it

.

FAN

1

FAN

2

MS

P/M

AP

MS

PM

AP

IIC c

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e be

twee

n M

SP

/MA

P a

nd M

AIN

IC91

01, I

C84

01C

heck

the

com

mun

icat

ion

lines

(S

CL_

AV

/SD

A_A

V).

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

69

5 6 7 8

Freq

uenc

y of

LE

D Fl

ashi

ngM

ajo

r Typ

eD

etai

led

Typ

eLo

g In

dica

tion

in F

acto

ry M

ode

Ch

eckp

oin

tP

oss

ible

Def

ecti

ve

Par

tR

emar

ksM

AIN

SU

B

RE

TR

YC

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e be

twee

n B

CM

7038

and

MA

INIC

6401

Che

ck th

e st

artu

p of

the

BC

M70

38 a

nd th

e co

mm

unic

atio

n lin

e w

ith M

AIN

.

DE

-BC

MP

erip

hery

of B

CM

7038

IC64

01D

E-F

EFr

ont-

end

bloc

k (A

NT-

A)

IC64

01, U

6101

IC69

03, I

C64

01

IC64

01, A

WV

2497

IC73

02, I

C64

01,

PO

D A

ssy

Che

ck th

e B

CM

7038

and

its

perip

hery

dev

ice

DE

-CA

S

Per

iphe

ry o

f VB

I slic

er

Che

ck th

e B

CM

7038

and

its

perip

hery

dev

ice

DE

-VB

IIC

7001

Che

ck th

e B

CM

7038

and

its

perip

hery

dev

ice

DE

-EP

1C

heck

the

BC

M70

38 a

nd it

s pe

riphe

ry d

evic

e

TV

-GC

heck

the

BC

M70

38 a

nd it

s pe

riphe

ry d

evic

e

HO

ME

-GH

NM

circ

uit

DT

V m

iddl

ewar

e

TV

-GU

IDE

func

tion

(Dat

a fr

om b

road

cast

wav

e)

DT

V a

pplic

atio

n

Che

ck th

e B

CM

7038

and

its

perip

hery

dev

ice

DT

VM

ID

DT

VA

PP

TV

Gui

de

Hom

e G

alle

ry

Mid

dlew

are

App

licat

ion

IIC c

omm

unic

atio

n lin

e be

twee

n E

EP

RO

M a

nd M

AIN

Che

ck th

e co

mm

unic

atio

n lin

es (

SC

L_E

P/S

DA

_EP

).IC

8404

, IC

8401

PS

/RS

T

DTV

com

mun

icat

ion

erro

rB

CM

7038

is a

bnor

mal

Tune

r1 o

r Tun

er2

Car

d I/F

IC

VB

I Slic

erE

EP

RO

M

DTV

sta

rtup

err

or

–

Blu

e 11

Hig

h te

mpe

ratu

re o

f the

un

it–

TE

MP

2–

Tem

pera

ture

sen

sor

or it

s pe

riphe

ry– – – –

TE

MP

2 A

shu

tdow

n oc

curs

bec

ause

of h

igh

tem

pera

ture

.

Per

iphe

ry o

f the

tem

pera

ture

sen

sor

TH

9091

TE

MP

2P

erip

hery

of t

he c

able

bet

wee

n IO

4 an

d M

6C

N88

04, C

N40

04C

heck

if c

able

s ar

e fir

mly

con

nect

ed.

Blu

e 12

Blu

e 15

Dig

ital T

uner

Mai

n E

EP

RO

M

DT

UN

ER

MA

-EE

P

Sta

rtup

of B

CM

7038

IC64

01C

heck

the

star

tup

of th

e B

CM

7038

and

the

com

mun

icat

ion

line

with

MA

IN.

Blu

e 13

Failu

re in

the

pow

er

supp

ly

DC

-DC

Con

vert

er p

ower

dec

reas

e

Mai

n E

EP

RO

M c

omm

unic

atio

n er

ror

Per

iphe

ry o

f con

nect

orC

heck

if c

able

s ar

e fir

mly

con

nect

ed.

CN

4111

STA

RT

Blu

e 14

Hom

e M

edia

Gal

lery

HM

GH

MG

sta

rtup

err

or

RS

T-M

A

M-D

CD

CD

C-D

C c

onve

rter

or

its p

erip

hery

, RS

T2

IC44

03, Q

4404

Che

ck if

V +

3.3

V_D

4 is

sta

rted

.E

MG

_US

BIC

4309

, Q43

04C

heck

if th

e vo

ltage

at a

wav

efor

m c

heck

poi

nt is

5 V

.

PO

WE

R S

UP

PLY

RE

LAY

The

12

V p

ower

is n

ot o

utpu

t, R

ST

4P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY U

nit

Che

ck if

V +

12

V is

sta

rted

.

The

6.5

V p

ower

is n

ot o

utpu

tP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY U

nit

Che

ck if

V +

6.5

V is

sta

rted

.

The

5.1

V p

ower

is n

ot o

utpu

tP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY U

nit

Che

ck if

V +

5.1

V is

sta

rted

.E

MG

_DD

CD

C-D

C c

onve

rter

Che

ck if

the

DC

-DC

con

vert

er is

ove

rload

ed.

Per

iphe

ry o

f the

cab

le b

etw

een

P8

and

M3

CN

4105

Che

ck if

cab

les

are

firm

ly c

onne

cted

.

HN

M p

ower

sup

ply

IC43

09, Q

4304

Che

ck if

the

volta

ge a

t a w

avef

orm

che

ck p

oint

is 5

V.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD70

1 2 3 4

5.5 NON-FAILURE INFORMATION5.5.1 INFORMATION ON SYMPTOMS THAT DO NOT CONSTITUTE FAILURE

Information on symptoms that do not constitute failure

SUPPLEMENT: On the video setting for HDMIThere are three types of HDMI output formats: color difference 4:4:4, color difference 4:2:2, and RGB4:4:4.(The proportions, such as 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, represent those of the amount of data for video signal components. For example, as for color difference 4:4:4, the proportion of the amount of data as for Y, Cb, and Cr is 4:4:4.)

It is required to make the settings of the PDP according to the settings of the output equipment. For usual operation, however, set them to AUTO. If the color is inappropriate, make the settings manually.In the HDMI system, video signals are coded at 24 bits per pixel and transmitted as a series of 24-bit pixels. In a case of color difference 4:4:4, Y, Cb, and Cr use 8 bits each. In a case of color difference 4:2:2, Y, Cb, and Cr use 12 bits each, but Cb and Cr are transmitted at a half sampling rate of Y. This unit is capable of processing the upper 10 bits out of 12 bits of video data. Recent high-end DVD players, such as Pioneer DV-79AVi, are capable of outputting 10-bit color-difference signals. In general, it is said that picture quality for color difference 4:2:2 format is assumed to be higher, because human eyes are more sensitive to luminance than to colors. In the case of RGB4:4:4, R, G, and B use 8 bits each.

Symptom Cause, item to check, information

HDMI: Symptoms concerning the input format and settings

The picture color for an INPUT 4 to 7 signal is not correct.The color setting for INPUT 4 to 7 is not compatible with that of the output equipment.Check whether the color setting is YPbPr or RGB.

The video signal to INPUT 4 to 7 is not displayed, and a message is displayed.

A unsupported video signal is input.

The audio signal input to the INPUT 4 to 5 is not output.No HDMI signal is input.

The audio setting for INPUT 4 to 5 is any setting and a video signal is not input. If the audio setting is any setting to output an analog audio signal, the HDMI signal must be input. (If a DVI device is to be connected, use a DVI-HDMI conversion cable.) If the HDMI video signal is not input, the analog audio signal is not output.

No sound of signals to INPUT 4 to 7 is output.The setting on the side of the HDMI output equipment is wrong.Example: Dolby Digital

DIGITAL OUT

Playback of the signal from the DIGITAL audio output connector is possible, but recording is not possible.

The video signal output from the DIGITAL connector is copy-protected.

Miscellaneous

The no-signal off function is not activated. The no-signal off and no-operation off functions are effective only if video (composite, S video, component, HDMI [excluding PC]) input or TV input is selected.The no-operation off function is not activated.

Power management does not function.Power Management is effective only while an analog PC signal is being input. It is not effective with HDMI-PC signal input.

The AUTO SETUP function is not activated. The Auto Setup function is effective only while an analog PC signal is being input. This function does not work if an analog PC signal is not input, even if the INPUT PC is selected.

Control via the SR connector is not possible. Wrong connection of the cable to the PC INPUT (AUDIO) connector is suspected.

The audio signal from the PC is not output. Wrong connection of the cable to the SR connector is suspected.

The picture-quality setting (AV Selection) is not stored.The picture-quality setting is stored for each input. As the setting is changed when another input is selected, the user may have a false idea that the setting is not stored.

The picture size changes arbitrary. The Auto Size setting is set to ON.

The display position of the screen changes slightly while the screen is on.

The orbiter function for minimizing the effects of phosphor burn is activated. Although the setting for this function can be changed on the Home menu, retaining the factory setting is strongly recommended.

The 1080p input signal is not displayed properly or at all, although the 1080i input signal is displayed properly.

Check that the connected cable supports HDMI Category 2. (As the clock frequency for the 1080p signal is triple that for the 1080i signal, signal degradation caused by a cable must not be neglected. A cable supporting HDMI Category 2 can be used for the 1080p signal. Although some conventional cables can support the 1080p signal, some others cannot.)

The video signal to the S video connector is not displayed.

The S Video or component video cable is connected to the same input function as for the composite video. (Priority of connectors: component video > S video > composite video)

The component video cable is connected to the same input function as for the S video (even if no signal is input to the component video connector, merely having something plugged in to the connector will result in judgment that a signal is being fed in and the component video connector takes priority). (Priority of connectors: component video > S video > composite video)

The video signal to the composite video connector is not displayed.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

71

5 6 7 8

5.5.1.1 CONFIRMATION ON THE HDMI CONTROL FUNCTION

When you use the HDMI Control (HDMI-CEC) function, if the unit does not function properly, such as not being able to control or recognize connected equipment, check the following:

" Confirmation of the manufacturer of the connected equipment Check if the connected equipment was manufactured by Pioneer and if it supports the HDMI Control function. If its manufacturer is not Pioneer, proper operations are not guaranteed.

" Confirmation of connections Check if the unit is connected properly, as shown in the figures below: (For details, refer to "Making the HDMI Control connections" in the Operating instructions.)

Check that the following conditions are met: • The connected equipment must support the HDMI Control function. • The equipment must be connected to the INPUT connector that has been selected in "Input Setting" on the HDMI Control Setting menu. • The connections must be made properly, as shown in the above figures (in a case where an AV device, such as an AV amplifier, and a DVD recorder/BD player are connected, in a case where only a DVD recorder/BD player is connected, and in a case where an AV device, such as an AV amplifier, which does not support HDMI-CEC, is connected). • When an AV device that supports the HDMI Control function is connected, it must be connected between the PDP and a DVD recorder/BD player. • The HDMI Control function must be activated on the connected equipment (DVD recorder, BD player, AV device [AV amplifier, etc.]). (Refer to the Operating instructions of the connected equipment.)

Example 1: When an AV amplifier that supports HDMI Control is connected

Example 2: When an AV amplifier that does not support HDMI Control is connected

Example 3: When an AV amplifier is not connected

Rear view

4 5

4 5

Optical digital cable (commercially available)

HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cable having the HDMI mark)

AV cable (commercially available)

AV amp

BD player

4 5

Rear view


BD player

Rear view

4 5

4 5

AV cable (commercially available)

Optical digital cable (commercially available)

BD playerAV amp


PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD72

1 2 3 4

" Confirmation of the number of connected devicesCheck that the number of connected devices does not exceed the maximum number for guaranteed operations.

" Confirmation of settingsCheck that the settings for the HDMI Control function are properly made. (For details, refer to "Setting the HDMI Control" in the Operating instructions.)

Check that the following conditions are met: • "Input Setting" on the HDMI Control Setting menu must be set to the same input as that to which the equipment that supports the HDMI Control function is connected. • When Power Off Control, Power-On Ready, or Hold Sound Status are to be used, their settings must be On.

" Confirmation of operationsCheck that the HDMI Control function works properly.(1) Connect a device that supports the HDMI Control function.

(2) Perform the procedures that are required after changing connections, which are described in "Making the HDMI Control connections" in the Operating instructions. 1 Turn on the plasma television and all the connected devices. 2 Confirm that the setting in “Input Setting” for “HDMI Control Setting” is properly entered according to the connected devices. Also confirm the HDMI Control related settings in the connected devices. 3 Switch to the HDMI input terminals to which the devices are connected to check if audio and video images are properly output and displayed. 4 Try turning off the plasma television, then turn the power back on to the plasma television.

(3) Perform "Power On Test" or "Power Off Test" on the HDMI Control Setting menu. (For details, refer to "Power On/Off Test" in the Operating instructions.)

If the following occurs even if the operation check is performed properly, a failure, such as breakage of the HDMI cable, problems on the side of the connected device, and problems with the MAIN Assy, may be suspected: • "Power On Test" or "Power Off Test" cannot be selected (the items are grayed) • The connected device cannot be turned on/off.

In some cases, an operation check using another HDMI input connector may be required in order to narrow down the cause.

EquipmentMaximunNumber

DVD recorder 2

BD player 2

AV System 1

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

73

5 6 7 8

5.5.2 FUNCTION OF DECREASING THE BRIGHTNESS LEVEL

High-temperature protection function 1/panel protection functions 1, 2, and 3High-temperature protection function 1/panel protection: The limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually decreased if the panel temperature reaches 80 °C.

High-temperature protection function 2The count of plasma discharge with regard to the APL will be decreased if the panel temperature becomes 55 °C or higher.

2000

700

APL (average picture level)

If the panel temperature (TEMP1) reaches 80 °C, the limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually decreased to lower the temperature of the panel.• This function is activated based on the TEMP1 temperature.• The limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be decreased 8 per 5 seconds.• The lowest limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge is about 700.• The maximum count of plasma discharge will begin to increase gradually if the panel temperature falls to the specified temperature.

High-temperature protection function 1

If a still picture is displayed for 3 minutes or more, the limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually decreased to minimize the effects of phosphor burn.• This function is activated after detection if the displayed picture is still (the picture will be considered to be still if only the mouse cursor is moved).• The limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be decreased 8 per 5 seconds.• The lowest limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge is about 700 (it takes about 15 minutes to reach the lowest limit, although the required time varies depending on the displayed picture).• The maximum count of plasma discharge will begin to increase gradually if the displayed picture is changed to animated picture.Note: How to decrease the brightness level in this function is the same as in high-temperature protection function 1.

Panel protection function 1 (protection against still picture)

If a particular load is applied to the SCAN IC, the limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually decreased.Note: How to decrease the brightness level in this function is the same as in high-temperature protection function 1.

Panel protection function 2 (SCAN IC protection)

A bright window, as shown in the figure on the right, on the screen increases the heat of the panel. If such a pattern is recognized on the screen, the limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually decreased.Note: How to decrease the brightness level in this function is the same as in high-temperature protection function 1.

Panel protection function 3 (protection against panel cracking)

If the panel temperature (TEMP1) reaches 55 °C, the plasma-discharge count that is determined based on the input APL will be decreased. In actual operation, the ABL adjustment value will be offset.• This function is activated based on the TEMP1 temperature.• The ABL adjustment value will be decreased by one step per 30 seconds.• The ABL adjustment value will begin to increase gradually if the panel temperature falls to the specified temperature.

High-temperature protection function 2

Max

imum

cou

nt o

f pla

sma

disc

harg

e

Detection example: Protection against panel cracking

Detection example: SCAN IC protection

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD74

1 2 3 4

5.6 OUTLINE OF THE OPERATION5.6.1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF FUNCTION

POWER SUPPLY Unit

When the panel drive-power is ON When the panel drive-power is OFF

Multi baseMulti base

GND

POWER SUPPLY Unit

Alligator clip

DRF-SW-B (TEST PIN)DRF-SW-B

(TEST PIN)

Function: It is an operational mode where the digital signal processing performs circuit operation but the power is not supplied to the panel driving system (Vsus, VAddress) in order to avoid a power down (PD).

Application:1. When it is necessary to check whether the signal output is correctly reaching the drive system in a repairing activity etc.2. In the case of a PD, to determine whether the problem is with the panel drive-power supply or with the other system power supply.

Method:1. Short-circuit between the specified location of the POWER SUPPLY Unit and GND (Multi base section recommended), using a jumper with alligator clips (refer to the photos below).2. Execute [DRV S00] by RS-232C command. ([DRV S01] for release)

Supplemental explanation:• When the panel drive-power is in OFF state, there will be no PD, except PS_PD, as the PD signal has been muted.• If the clip is removed in the OFF state of the panel drive-power, PD will take place at the instance of clip removal. Therefore, be sure to remove the clip after turning the power OFF.• Under RS-232C command control, [DRV S01] (release) is possible during power ON. However, there is a possibility of damaging the set. Therefore, make this operation only after turning the power OFF.• Command [DRV S00/S01] is effective even during standby. • When the main power switch is set to OFF, no command is accepted.• When the AC power cord is unplugged, the panel drive-power OFF state established by the [DRV S00] command is canceled. (The panel drive-power OFF state remains in effect even if the main power switch is set to OFF after that command is sent.)

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

75

5 6 7 8

5.6.2 SPECIFICATION OF THE FAN CONTROL

The internal fan cools down the MTB and Power blocks.The external fans cool down the whole unit.

• The operating temperature of the fan is higher than the ambient temperature, because the sensor temperature is read by the microcomputer.• If the critical values for signals are displayed in the address circuit, the fan may be activated or be rotated at higher speed in response to values lower than the set temperature values shown above.• When the temperature rises, the sensor voltage of TEMP2 decreases.• When the voltage of the DAC output for external FAN decreases, rotation speed of FAN rises.

DIGITAL Assy TANSHI Assy

If an emergency signalis detected, it will be transmitted.

DAC output

Block diagram

Operation specifications

Notes:

FAN_VCC10 to 12V

0 to 12V

FAN_VCC2

TEMP2FAN_NG1FAN_ON1FAN_CONT1

FAN_NG2FAN_ON2FAN_CONT2

HIGH

LOW

Temperature SDSTOP

36.0 ºC 39.0 ºC 39.0 ºC 42.0 ºC 62.0 ºC

DAC2

DAC1

STOP0xFF 36.5 ºC 38.5 ºC 46.0 ºC 60.0 ºC 62.0 ºC

Internal FAN

External FAN

FAN_1_REG

OR

FAN_2_REG

TEMP2

IF_Ucom

Main_Ucom

Module_Ucom

R R

Internal fan External fans

FHD FANCONNECTAssy

MAIN Assy

The Main micro-computer controls the IF microcomputeras a port expander.

Detection of disconnection

Detection of disconnection

VOLTAGECONTROL

VOLTAGECONTROL

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD76

1 2 3 4

5.6.3 PROCESSING IN ABNORMALITY

Specifications for port monitoring

Operation specifications of the main CPU

Conditions for resetting the circuits

Port Name SD/PD Indication Active

A_NG_B AUDIO Shutdown occurs when the signal is "L."30 mS ∗ 3 times

OTW AUDIO Shutdown occurs when the signal is "L."130 mS ∗ 3 times

Monitoring conditions

RST4 = "H" (always) (Monitoring starts 2 sec after the above conditions are established.)

Operation

The main CPU operations described below will be performed when either "A_NG_B = L" or "OTW = L" is detected (established) under the monitoring conditions.

Protection of the Power Amplifier

A_NG_BA_NG_BMAIN_UCOM

PULL_D

OTWOTW

MAIN AssyTANSHI Assy

(1) When a shutdown decision is made by the main CPU • After a warning indication is displayed for 5 sec, a shutdown is generated (the blue LED flashes 5 times). • A warning indication is displayed for all input-signal types. • Example of a warning indication: "The speaker terminals are short-circuited. After reconnection, turn the unit on again." (For 50-inch models) (For 42-inch models, an indication declaring a forced power-off is displayed.)

(2) Display conditions When the panel is on: A warning indication is displayed immediately. When the panel is off: A warning indication is not displayed immediately but is displayed when the panel is turned on.Note: A warning indication is displayed each time the panel is turned on if the conditions for a shutdown persist.

The circuits will be reset upon Standby ON/OFF.

IF_UCOMDIGITALPOWERAMP IC

Circuit configuration

PULL_D

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

77

5 6 7 8



RST2 ASIC power(M-DCDC)

Shutdown occurs when the signal is "L."for 5 sec after PSW1 is ON.orfor 2 sec while the unit is ON.

RST3 AC power AC_OFF when the signal is "H."


• Panel ON (RST4 = H and PSW1 = L)• While awaiting restoration of RST2 (RST2 = L)

Operation

The SD timer starts when "RST2 = L" is detected under monitoring conditions. If "RST3 = H," "M_SW_DET_B = H," or "RST4 = L" is detected, or if a power-down or shutdown in the module microcomputer system is not generated, the unit waits for 30 mS. Then, if the SD timer continues to count for 2 sec or more, a shutdown is determined, and a shutdown process starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 13 times) starts. The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on.If RST2 is H, a restoration process starts according to the latest power-on/-off status.

• Active STB (including SD/PD statuses)• Functional STB• Panel ON• (Areas other than North America) While the main power switch is set to OFF (M_SW_DET_B = H)• (North America) While the main power switch is set to OFF (M_SW_DET_B = H)• While awaiting restoration of AC power (RST3 = H)• While awaiting restoration of RST2 (RST2 = L)• While awaiting restoration of RST4 (RST4 = L)

If "RST3 = H" (AC_OFF) is detected under the monitoring conditions, a power-off process starts. Monitoring of the RST3 port is continued, while monitoring of other ports is interrupted. Communication is controlled only by the IF microcomputer. The port outputs are set as specified. If the signal at the RST3 port continues to be H after 30 mS of waiting, monitoring is continued. If RST3 is L, a restoration process starts according to the latest power-on/-off status.

RST4 MAIN power(RELAY)

Shutdown occurs if the signal is "L."for 5 sec after RELAY is ON.orfor 2 sec while the unit is ON or in Functional STB.

• Functional STB• Panel ON• (Areas other than North America) While the main power switch is set to OFF (M_SW_DET_B = H)• While awaiting restoration of RST2 (RST2 = L)• While awaiting restoration of RST4 (RST4 = L)

The SD timer starts when "RST4 = L" (power-off of devices in the functional STB system) is detected under monitoring conditions. The RST4 initialization process starts, and input monitoring, communication setting, and output-terminal setting are performed. The RST4-SD timer starts. If either "RST3 = H" or "M_SW_DET_B = H" is detected, or if a power-down or shutdown in the module microcomputer system is not generated, the unit waits for 30 mS. Then, if the SD timer continues to count for 2 sec or more, a shutdown is determined, and a shutdown process starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 13 times) starts. The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on.If RST4 is H, a restoration process starts according to the latest power-on/-off status.

Power supply and DC-DC converter

SW_REG

MAINPOWER

SW

DC/DC Converter

MODULE_Ucom

Inverter

AND

AND

OvervoltageDetection

RST4

RST3

PSW1

RST2

ACTIVE

AC shutdowndetection

Voltagedetection

Voltagedetection

DC_DC Converteroutput control

PON/POFFCommand

StartupMain ucom

Command

MAIN_UCOM IF_UCOMPOWER SUPPLY Unit

DIGITAL ASSY

MAIN Assy


V+3.3V_D

V+3.3V_UCOM

V+5.1V

AC_DET

RELAY

PULL_U

V+12V

PULL_D

PULL_U

V+5V_USB

V+6.5V

PULL_D

PULL_U

V+5.1V

EMG_DDC

EMG_USB

PULL_D

PULL_U

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD78

1 2 3 4

FAN CONT1

TEMP2

FAN_NG1 (H act)

V+3_3V_UCOM

TEMP2

FAN_12V

FAN_12V

DriveCircuit

PULL_U PULL_U

SENSOR

FAN ON1

FAN CONT2

FAN_NG2 (H act)

DriveCircuit

OR

FAN ON2

Fan and temperature sensor


MAIN Assy

PANEL SENSORAssy

FHD FANCONNECT Assy

TANSHI Assy

DIGITAL Assy

IF_UCOM

V+3_3V_UCOM

PULL_U

FAN1

FAN

FAN

FAN

V+3_3V_UCOM

TEMP1SENSOR MAIN_UCOM

DAC

MODULE_UCOM

PULL_D



FAN_NG1 FAN1 Shutdown occurs when the signal is "H."1 S ∗ 3 times

TEMP2 High temperature at MTB

Shutdown occurs if any values equal to or greater than minimum to require a shutdown are detected.1 S ∗ 3 times


RST4 = H and FAN_ON1 = H (Monitoring starts 3 sec after the above conditions are established.)

Operation

If FAN_NG1 (for details on detection logic, see "File of fan-control specifications") is detected (established) under the monitoring conditions, a shutdown process starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 10 times) starts. The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on.

FAN_NG2 FAN Shutdown occurs when the signal is "H."1 S ∗ 3 times

RST4 = H and FAN_ON2 = H (Monitoring starts 3 sec after the above conditions are established.)

If FAN_NG2 (for details on detection logic, see "File of fan-control specifications") is detected (established) under the monitoring conditions, a shutdown process starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 10 times) starts. The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on.

RST4 = H (Monitoring starts 1 sec after the above conditions are established.)

If any values equal to or greater than minimum to require a shutdown are detected (established) under the monitoring conditions, a warning indication will be displayed for 30 sec, after which a shutdown process starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 11 times) starts. The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on.

TMP_NG High temperature in the drive circuits

Low temperature in the drive circuits

Shutdown occurs if any values equal to or greater than minimum to require a shutdown are detected.200 mS ∗ 5 times (average)

Digital video RST2 = H If any values equal to or greater than minimum to require a shutdown is detected (established) under the monitoring conditions, those changes in status will be transmitted to the main microcomputer via the UART. Upon receiving the data, a warning indication will be displayed for 30 sec, after which a shutdown process starts. The main microcomputer orders a specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 4 times). The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on.

If any values equal to or greater than minimum to require a shutdown is detected (established) under the monitoring conditions, those changes in status will be transmitted to the main microcomputer via the UART. Upon receiving the data, the main microcomputer orders a specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 4 times). The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon the next power-on.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

79

5 6 7 8

5.6.4 TRAP SWITCH

For video data transmission inside this Plasma Display, digital signals are used. Therefore, this unit adopts the HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) system for copyright protection. This unit is also provided with a detection switch (TRAP switch) that will prohibit the unit from being turned on again "if the rear case of the unit is accidentally opened," in order to prevent the panel technology from being leaked out.

The TRAP switch is disabled while the unit is turned off.When performing internal diagnosis of the PDP, fix the switch to the OFF position using adhesive tape before turning on the unit. After servicing, be sure to remove the adhesive tape.

WHEN THE TRAP SWITCH IS ACTIVATEDWhen the TRAP switch is activated, the red and blue LEDs will light.In order to deactivate the TRAP switch, close the upper plate of the unit or fix the TRAP switch to the OFF position in the manner described above.Then, follow procedures (1) or (2) below:

(1) Deactivating with the remote control unit • Enter Factory mode. • Proceed to the INITIALIZE layer of Factory mode. Hold the DISPLAY key pressed for more than 5 seconds.

(2) Deactivating with the RS-232C command • Send the CTM (cancel) command.

Outline and Notes

TRAP switch

POD Assy MAIN Assy

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD80

1 2 3 4

6. SERVICE FACTORY MODE6.1 OUTLINE OF THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE

6.1.1 SERVICE FACTORY MODE TRANSITION CHART

6.1.2 HOW TO ENTER/EXIT SERVICE FACTORY MODE

Operations during Service Factory mode are described here.

POWER[POF]

FACT[FAY]

FACTHOME MENU[FAN]

RS-232C Factory mode

OPTION

INITIALIZE

[ (MUTING)]

Effective 232C

Effective IR in Factory mode

command in Factory mode

Standby mode Power supply ON mode

PANEL FACTORY

• The function is changed.• The signal mode is changed. INFORMATION

(MTB INFORMATION)

How to enter Service Factory ModeBy using a PDP service remote control) • PDP service remote control : Press [FACTORY] key.By issuing RS-232C commands ) • During normal Standby mode : Issue [PON] then [FAY]. • During normal operation mode : Issue [FAY].

How to exit Service Factory ModeBy using a PDP service remote control) • PDP service remote control : press [FACTORY] key. • Supplied remote control unit : press [HOME MENU] key.By issuing RS-232C commands) • Issue [FAN].

How to enter Service Factory Mode by Using the supplied Remote Control Unit

• Same as previous model. Please refer to the technical document (Service Know-how).

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

81

5 6 7 8

6.1.3 FUNCTIONS WHEN ENTERING THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE

User data User data will be treated as follows :

• User data on picture-quality and audio-quality adjustments are not reflected, and factory-preset data are output (user data will be retained in memory). When the unit enters Service Factory mode, the current audio-quality adjustment data will be still be retained in memory.• User-setting data will be applied to the various settings (items on the menus), signal formats, and the items that are associated with path change (HDMI settings, etc.).• Data on screen (i.e., screen position; meaning clock dividers, and not including data on screen size). Are reset to the default values (data stored in memory will be retained). Screen size will be retained.

The settings for the following functions are set to OFF when Service Factory mode is entered(including when the “FAY” command is received) :

Note: Enter the factory after cancelling ACI because the ACI operation setting OFF and not done.

Fuctions whose setting are set to OFF

Function Remarks

2-Screen Operation Input function set on the main side is selected.

FREEZE

Auto size, Side Mask

ORBITER, Mask control Central value operation (ORBITER)

Sleep Timer Cancel the operation.

Room light sensor Turn off the detecting operation (Setting data will be retained.)

Blue LED dimmer Turn off the operation (Setting data will be retained.)

Detection of the TRAP switch The detection operation is stopped.

TRAP history To a possible turning on though the memory is maintained.

Finish the TV-GUIDE function.

It is not performed during Factory mode.

Display of TV guide

Setting of Parental Control When this is turned off, the block of the screen is released.

Power Control Turn off the operation (However, the setting maintains it.)

Image Position Central value operation

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD82

1 2 3 4

6.1.4 REMOTE CONTROL CODE IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE

Remote Control Keys Basic Functions Remarks

MUTING Switching the main items. Shifting to the next main item (top).

j (DOWN) Switching the subtitled items. Shifting downward to the next subtitiled item.

i (UP) Switching the subtitled items. Shifting upward to the next upper layer.

k (LEFT) Decreasing the adjustment value. Decreasing the adjustment value.

l (RIGHT) Increasing the adjustment value. Increasing the adjustment value.

ENTER/SET Switching the layers. Shifting downward or upward to the next lower or upper layer.

INPUT Selecting INPUT. Shifting the INPUT to the next function.

INPUTxx Selecting INPUT. Switching the INPUT to xx. (xx=1 to 7 etc)

CH+/P+ Increasing the channel number.

CH-/P- Decreasing the channel number.

Numeric Keys Function: TV Function: TV (previously selected channel number is selected)

POWER Power OFF. Turning the power off.

FACTORYFactory OFF (Factory mode) In Factory mode, turning Factory mode off.

Factory ON (Non-Factory mode). In Non-Factory mode, turn Fuctory mode on.

HOME MENU Menu ON. In Factory mode, turn Factory mode off.

VOLUME+ Volume UP. Increasing 10 the adjustment value. (PANEL FACTORY)

VOLUME- Volume DOWN. Decreasing 10 the adjustment value. (PANEL FACTORY)

DRIVE OFF (Note1) Drive Mode OFF. Turning Drive mode off.

INTEGRATOR INTEGRATOR MENU ON. Enter INTEGRATOR MODE.

(Note 1) When ten seconds have passed since the [DRIVE OFF] key was pressed at the standby, it becomes invalid. Please press [POWER] key from the [DRIVE OFF] key pressing within ten seconds when you do power supply ON while driven OFF.

PRO-1150HDPRO-950HD

PDP-5010FDPDP service remote control

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

83

5 6 7 8

6.1.5 PDP SERVICE REMOTE CONTROL

• The keys labeled with the same names on the service remote control unit have the same functions as those of the supplied remote control unit. (See "2.3 PANEL FACILITIES.")• For the keys not provided on the supplied remote control unit, see the explanations below:

POINT ZOOMNot used with this model.ZOOM +/-Not used with this model.

GENERATION switch for remote control codesThis switch selects the generation of remote control codes to be transmitted:1: The old-generation codes are transmitted.2: The new-generation codes are transmitted.With this generation plasma display, set the switch to 2.

INTEGRATORPress this key to enter Integrator mode.

INPUTPress this key to cyclically change the input source.

EXT INPUTPress this key to cyclically change only the external input source.

SUB INPUTNot used with this model.

DRIVE OFFPress this key to turn off the panel drive.For details on how to cancel this command, see the explanation for the DRV command.

FACTORYPress this key to enter Factory mode.2nd FACTORYNot used with this model.

AUTO SETUPUse this key for automatic setup, such as the display position setting when an analog PC signal is input.ID NO. SETNot used with this model.

CLEARNot used with this model.

POWER CONTROLNot used with this model.

POWER ONPress this key to turn on the unit. This key cannot turn the unit off.POWER OFFPress this key to turn off the unit. This key cannot turn the unit on.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD84

1 2 3 4

6.1.6 FACTORY HIERARCHICAL TABLE

Large ItemVariable / Adjustment Range RemarksMiddle Item

Small Item6.2.1 INFORMATION

6.2.1.1 VERSION (1)6.2.1.2 VERSION (2)

CLEAR <=> NO <=> YES

MTB HOUR METER CLEAR NO <=> YES

6.2.1.3 VERSION (3)6.2.1.4 MAIN NG6.2.1.5 TEMPERATURE6.2.1.6 HOUR METER6.2.1.7 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1

6.2.1.9 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 16.2.1.8 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2

6.2.1.10 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 26.2.1.11 DTV TUNING STATUS 16.2.1.12 DTV TUNING STATUS 26.2.1.13 DTV TUNING STATUS 36.2.1.14 DTV TV-GUIDE BER6.2.1.15 DEBUG INFO

6.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+)6.2.2.1 PANEL INFORMATION6.2.2.2 PANEL WORKS6.2.2.3 POWER DOWN6.2.2.4 SHUT DOWN6.2.2.5 PANEL-1 ADJ (+) VOL SUS <=> 000 to 255 Equivalent to VSU (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)

VOL OFFSET <=> 000 to 255 Equivalent to VOF (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)VOL RST P <=> 000 to 255 Equivalent to VRP (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)VOL XPOFS1 <=> 000 to 255 Equivalent to VX1 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)VOL XPOFS2 <=> 000 to 255 Equivalent to VX2 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)VOL YNOFS1 <=> 000 to 255 Equivalent to VY1 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)VOL YNOFS3 <=> 000 to 255 Equivalent to VY3 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)VOL YNOFS4 <=> 000 to 255 Equivalent to VY4 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)RESET1ST_KSB <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to R1K (Setting value: 128 fixed)RESET2ND_KSB <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to R2K (Setting value: 128 fixed)YSTL_1SF_KSB <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to Y1K (Setting value: 128 fixed)

YSTL_1SF_HZ <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to Y1Z (Setting value: 128 fixed)XSUS_1ST_B <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to X1B (Setting value: 128 fixed)YSUS_2ND_B <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to Y2B (Setting value: 128 fixed)XSUS_3RD_B <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to X3B (Setting value: 128 fixed)YSUS_B <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to YSB (Setting value: 128 fixed)XSUS_B <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to XSB (Setting value: 128 fixed)YSTL_KSB <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to YTK (Setting value: 128 fixed)YSTL_HZ <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to YTZ (Setting value: 128 fixed)YSTL_2SF_KSB <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to Y2K (Setting value: 128 fixed)YSTL_2SF_HZ <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to Y2Z (Setting value: 128 fixed)

YSTL_FMR_KSB <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to YNK (Setting value: 128 fixed)YSTL_FMR_HZ <=> 112 to 144 Equivalent to YNZ (Setting value: 128 fixed)SUS FREQ. <=> MODE 1 to MODE 8 Equivalent to SFR (Setting value: MODE1)

6.2.2.6 PANEL-2 ADJ (+) R-HIGH <=> 000 to 511 Equivalent to PRH (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)G-HIGH <=> 000 to 511 Equivalent to PGH (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)B-HIGH <=> 000 to 511 Equivalent to PBH (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)R-LOW <=> 000 to 999 Equivalent to PRL (Setting value: 512 fixed)G-LOW <=> 000 to 999 Equivalent to PGL (Setting value: 512 fixed)B-LOW <=> 000 to 999 Equivalent to PBL (Setting value: 512 fixed)ABL <=> 000 to 255 Equivalent to ABL (Setting value: Factory adjustment value)

6.2.2.7 PANEL FUNCTION (+) R-LEVEL <=> LV-0 to LV-7 Equivalent to RRL (Setting value: Lv-1)G-LEVEL <=> LV-0 to LV-7 Equivalent to RGL (Setting value: Lv-1)B-LEVEL <=> LV-0 to LV-7 Equivalent to RBL (Setting value: Lv-0)ADDRESS L1 <=> PH0 to PH9 Equivalent to AP0S*- (Setting value: PH1)ADDRESS L2 <=> PH0 to PH9 Equivalent to AP0S-* (Setting value: PH0)

ADDRESS L3 <=> PH0 to PH9 Equivalent to AP1S*- (Setting value: PH2)ADDRESS L4 <=> PH0 to PH9 Equivalent to AP1S-* (Setting value: PH1)

ADDRESS U1 <=> PH0 to PH9 Equivalent to AP2S*- (Setting value: PH1)ADDRESS U2 <=> PH0 to PH9 Equivalent to AP2S-* (Setting value: PH0)

ADDRESS U3 <=> PH0 to PH9 Equivalent to AP3S*- (Setting value: PH2)ADDRESS U4 <=> PH0 to PH9 Equivalent to AP3S-* (Setting value: PH1)

STK MODE <=> OFF <=> MODE1 to MODE8 <=> SKM S00 to S07

for the technical analysis


*: Setting value

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

85

5 6 7 8

Large ItemVariable / Adjustment Range RemarksMiddle Item

Small Item6.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+)

6.2.2.8 ETC. (+) BACKUP DATA <=> NO OPRT <=> TRANSFER or ERR Equivalent to BCPDIGITAL EEPROM <=> NO OPRT <=> DELETE/REPAIR Equivalent to FAJ/UAJPD INFO. <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR Equivalent to CPDSD INFO. <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR Equivalent to CSDHR-MTR INFO. <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR Equivalent to CHMPM/B1-B5 <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR Equivalent to CPMP COUNT INFO. <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR Equivalent to CPCMAX TEMP. <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR Equivalent to CMT

6.2.2.9 RASTER MASK SETUP (+) MASK OFF Equivalent to MKS+S00RST MASK 01 <=> <=> 48V <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 72V <=>

75V <=> 60P <=>

<=> 48V <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 72V <=> 75V <=> 60P <=>

<=> 48V <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 72V <=> 75V <=> 60P <=>

Equivalent to MKS+S51• • • • • • RST MASK 25 <=> Equivalent to MKS+S75

6.2.2.10 PATTERN MASK SETUP (+) MASK OFF Equivalent to MKS+S00PTN MASK 01 <=> Equivalent to MKS+S01• • • • • • PTN MASK 49 <=> Equivalent to MKS+S49

6.2.2.11 COMBI MASK SETUP (+) MASK OFF Equivalent to MKC+S00CMB MASK 01 <=> Equivalent to MKC+S01• • • • • • CMB MASK 17 <=> Equivalent to MKC+S17

Exclusively used for production line

6.2.4 INITIALIZE


6.2.3 OPTION6.2.3.1 EDID WRITE MODE <=>6.2.3.2 ANTENNA MODE <=>

6.2.3.3 AFT <=>


6.2.3.4 SYNC DET (+)

6.2.3.5 CC (+)

6.2.4.1 SIDE MASK LEVEL (+)6.2.4.2 FINAL SETUP DATA RESET <=>

SIDE MASK LEVEL <=>

NO <=> YES

6.2.4.3 HMG/HG SERVICE MODE MODE SHIFT <=> NO <=> YES

DISABLE <=> ENABLECABLE <=> AIR

DISABLE <=> ENABLE

DISABLE <=> ENABLE6.2.4.4 Wide XGA AUTO <=>Exclusively used for technical analysis(details omitted)

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD86

1 2 3 4

6.1.7 INDICATIONS IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE

1 2 3 4

N NI F O R

EV R S I (N 1 )O

/I F 0–AM I N 0–

7 A2 2K

0– 2 K

0– 6 AA0– 3 W _

0 K10 A1

0 A1

0 AA

10 1

UM L T I P R S0– 2 KP I C

OM D U L EES Q

AP N L I N F O X X X X X X X XE

P R S

AM T I O V –D 1 3 10 1 0 – N T V HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

V –D 1 3 10 1 0 – N T V HA– B

20 25 30 35 40Main-item indications

Main-items

Subtitled-items

Note: See SIG-Mode Tables. (See next page.)

1 Input function

2 SIG mode and Screen size

3 Color system and Signal type

Input Functions OSDVIDEO 1 to 7 VD 1 to 7

Terrestrial Wave A ARA

Terrestrial Wave B ARB

Cable A CBA

4 Option (Destination, Panel Generation, etc.)

Options OSD

Regular model ATB

ELITE model AHB

Color System and Signal Type OSD

NTSC NTV

NTS

Y/CB/CR

Y/PB/PR

RGB

CBR

PBR

RGB

DIGDigital Video signal

Composite input

S-connector input

Cable B CBB

Home Gallery (Regular model only) HG

Home Media Gallery (ELITE model only) HMG

PC PC

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

87

5 6 7 8

2 SIG Mode and Screen size (by User is displayed)1st and 2nd characters : Resolution of the input signal3rd and 4th characters : Refresh rate of the input signal5th character : Selection of the screen size

g Input signal mode table for video signals (resolutions and V frequencies)

g Input signal mode table for PC signals (resolutions and V frequencies)

g Current selection of the screen size

Fv: Vertical Frequency, Fh: Horizontal Frequency

Fv: Vertical Frequency, Fh: Horizontal Frequency

1st to 4th Character Signal Type Fv (Hz) Fh (kHz)10 60 SDTV*525i 60.000 15.750

20 60 SDTV*525p 60.000 31.500

30 60 HDTV*1125i 60.000 33.750

40 60 HDTV*750p 60.000 45.000

50 24 HDTV*1125p 24.000 27.000

50 60 HDTV*1125p 60.000 67.500

k: supported, −: unsupportedNote (∗): It is effective only with models having the Full HD panel.

5th Character GUI Notation VIDEO PC Remarks0 DOT BY DOT k (∗) −1 4:3 k k

2 FULL k k

3 ZOOM k −4 CINEMA k −5 WIDE k −

1st to 4th Character Signal Type Fv (Hz) Fh (kHz)C1 70 720 x 400 70.087 31.469C2 60 640 x 480 59.940 31.469C4 800 x 60060 60.317 37.879

C6 1280 x 72060 60.000 44.800

C7 60 1024 x 768 60.004 48.363C9 60 1360 x 768 60.015 47.712D6 60 1280 x 1024 60.000 64.000

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD88

1 2 3 4

6.2 DETAILS OF FACTORY MENU6.2.1 INFORMATION

� Operation items

No. Function/Display ContextRS-232C

Command

6.2.1.1 VERSION (1) The Flash memory versions for each device are displayed. (Common part) QS1

6.2.1.4 MAIN NG The Shutdown Message ID/Event Times in Main Microcomputer are displayed. QNG

6.2.1.2 VERSION (2)

6.2.1.3 VERSION (3)The Flash memory versions for each device are displayed. (Individual part) QSE

6.2.1.5 TEMPERATURE The Temperature/FAN rotating status in Main Microcomputer are displayed. QMT

6.2.1.6 HOUR METER The HOUR METER/P-COUNT information are displayed. QS3

6.2.1.7 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1The Information of HDMI information files are displayed. –

6.2.1.8 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2

6.2.1.9 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1

6.2.1.10 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2Display the Signal Information on VDEC. –

6.2.1.11 DTV TUNING STATUS 1

6.2.1.12 DTV TUNING STATUS 2Digital broadcast information and status is displayed upon receiving digital broadcast signal. –

6.2.1.13 DTV TUNING STATUS 3

6.2.1.14 DTV TV-GUIDE BER TV-Guide Bit Error Rate information –

6.2.1.15 DEBUG INFO Debug information –

Note: In the 29-32 rows, the Boot version information on each device is displayed. In the 19-24 rows, the version of the execution program is displayed.

• PANEL INFO: It displays the generation of the panel, inchage and the type of the panel. For details on display values and settings, see "10: Panel Information" in "9.3.1. QS1 (PANEL STATUS)."

Microcomputer Item NameDisplay Example

(Execution program block)Display Example

(Boot block)I/F microcomputer I/F -07A 01AMain microcomputer MAIN -02K2 01KMulti processor MULTI PRS -02K 01AMulti processor MULTI PIC -02KModule microcomputer MODULE -06A 01ASequence processor SEQ PRS -03W_A 01A

6.2.1.1 VERSION (1)

N NI F O R

EV R S I (N 1 )O

/I F 0–AM I N 0–

7 A2 2K

0– 2 K

0– 6 AA0– 3 W _

0 K10 A1

0 A1

0 AA

10 1

UM L T I P R S0– 2 KP I C

OM D U L EES Q

AP N L I N F O X X X X X X X XE

P R S

AM T I O V –D 1 3 10 1 0 – N T V HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

89

5 6 7 8

N NI F O R

EV R S I (N 2 )O

TD VAH R WD A R E X X X X X X X XES R AI L 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7UR N IT M E X X X X X X X XFC E H H H H H H H HEK R EN L H H H H H H H HOR O ST H H H H H H H HLF A SG H / W ( Y )

VD R ( Y ) F O N T S ( Y )FD A TS ( Y ) P L O G ( Y )

AM T I O C –B A 3 10 6 0 – D I G HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

6.2.1.2 VERSION (2)

6.2.1.3 VERSION (3)

Meaning Item Name Display Example

DTV Hardware Version HARDWARE XXXXXXXXDTV Hardware Serial SERIAL 01234567DTV Runtime Version RUNTIME HHHHHHHHCFE Version CFE HHHHHHHHKERNEL Version KERNEL HHHHHHHHROOTS Version ROOTS HHHHHHHH

H/W (Y)FLAGS FLAGS DVR (Y) FONTS(Y)

DFAST(Y) PLOG (Y)

N NI F O R

EV R S I (N 3 )O

MH G H/ G 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7A SP WS O R D 1 2 3 4

AM T I O C –B A 3 10 6 0 – D I G HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

Meaning Item Name Display Example

HMG/HG module Version HMG/HG 01234567User Password PASSWORD 1234

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD90

1 2 3 4

N NI F O R

AM IUS B

N GN

AM1 – I I

AM I N

CAM2

3– I I C

EF 1VA – S WFI–– – – – ––– – – – –

MA – 3 L45678

MA I NT E M P 2

AM T I O V –D 1 3 10 6 0 – N T V HA–

50 0 1 1 H 2 1 M

30 0 0 1 H 5 0 M10 0 0 3 H 0 3 M00 0 0 2 H 5 2 M00 0 0 1 H 5 8 M00 0 0 0 H 0 7 M

B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

OSD: MAIN OSD: SUB Cause of ShutdownAUDIO ----

MODULE ---- Failure of communication to Module microcomputer.

Short-circuit of the speaker terminal or failure of audio amplifier.

MA-3L 3-wire Serial Communication of Main microcomputer.

IF Communication failure of IF microcomputer

MULTI Multi Processor communication failure

MA-IIC IIC Communication failure of Main microcomputer

FE1 Analog Tuner 1

MSPMAP MSP/MAP

FE2 Analog Tuner 2

AV-SW AV Switch

RGB-SW RGB Switch

VDEC VDEC

SDRAM VDEC - SDRAM

ADC AD/PLL

HDMI HDMI

US-MSP

FAN1

MSP

RETRY DTV communication error

DE-BCM Abnormally in BCM7038

DE-FE Tuner 1 or 2

DE-CAS Card I/F IC

DE-VBI VBI Slicer

DE-EPI EEPROM

TV-G TV-Guide Error

HOME-G Failure at Home Gallery

DTVMID Middleware

DTVAPP Application

MAIN Communication failure of Main microcomputer

FAN Fan stopped

FAN2 Fan stopped (Only with models having the Full HD panel)

TEMP2

RST-MA

Abnormally high temperature at MTB.

DTUNER Failure of Digital Tuner

PS/RST Failure to DTV Starting

RELAY Abnormally in RST4 of MAIN Assy. (power decrease of Relay power)

M-DCDC Abnormally in RST2 of MAIN Assy. (power decrease of DC-DC converter)

MA-EEP IIC communication line between EEPROM and MAIN.

HMG

HMG Home Media Gallery startup error

Failure at Home Media Gallery

6.2.1.4 MAIN NG

MTB side's Shutdown NG information

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

91

5 6 7 8

N NI F O R

A

C

M

L E A R < = > : N O

I N GN

8

AM T I O V –D 1 3 10 6 0 – N T V HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

Operation:Even if [k] key or [l] key is pressed, {CLEAR <=> :YES} ⇔ {CLEAR <=> :NO} is repeated.If the [ENTER/SET] key is kept on pressing for 5 second when the status of this menu is <YES>,clear process will begin.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD92

1 2 3 4

N NI F O R

ET M P AR UR EE T

MET P 1

MET P 2

:

:

:N 1AF

401 . 3

401 . 3

( F )

( F ) 031 ( A / D )

WOL

:N 2AF –––

:S E N S O R–B 20 3 ( A / D )1

AM T I O V –D 1 3 10 6 0 – N T V HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

• Display/Meaning TEMP1 : The temperature of the sensor on the panel side is displayed by the Fahrenheit (F). TEMP2 : The temperature conversion display is done with 10 bit the A/D input value of IF uCOM 90 pin (AN4). It is displayed by both the Fahrenheit (F) and 8 bit A/D value. (Remark:When temperature (F) of the sensor becomes more than a specified temperature, the shutdown start of processing.) FAN1 : The value of the FAN rotating state is displayed. STOP: stopped, LOW: slow speed, HIGH: high speed. FAN2 : The value of the rotation state of FAN is displayed. During a rotation of FAN, 8bit D/A value output from 2 pin (DA0) of IF uCOM is displayed. It is displayed with OFF during a stop (only for the FHD model). B-SENSOR : The value that indicated the degree of brightness input into an Room light sensor is displayed. AD value when the output of the Room light sensor was input into 89 pin (AN5) of IF uCOM is displayed.

A present temperature and the FAN rotation are displayed.If either [k] key or [l] key is pressed, the display data is refreshed.

6.2.1.5 TEMPERATURE

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

93

5 6 7 8

6.2.1.6 HOUR METER

Note: The PANEL-side's HOUR METER/P-COUNT acquires information from the PANEL-side.

In HOUR METER screen on Factory Menu, press the [ENTER] key, and then it moves to the screnn to clear MTB HOUR METER. (MTB HOUR METER is cleared only.)

N NI F O R

OH U R EM E RT

NAP E L

S/ E R I A LP A N E L

P C- O U NS RE I A L

T

C O U N T

AM T I O V –D 1 3 10 6 0 – N T V HA–

50 0 1 1 H 2 1 MBTM 50 0 1 1 H 2 1 M

50 00 00_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

0

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

9 T I M E S

B

Meaning Item Name Display Example Corresponding RS-232C CommandHOUR METER (PANEL) PANEL 00151H 21M QS3

POWER ON COUNTER P-COUNT 00000095 TIMES QS3

HOUR METER (MTB) MTB 00151H 21M QS3

SYSTEM SERIAL SERIAL QS3

• Display/Meaning

• MTB HOUR METER

N NI F O R

T

C

M

L E A R < = > : N O

B H RUO M E RTE

8

AM T I O V –D 1 3 10 6 0 – N T V HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

Operation:Even if [k] key or [l] key is pressed, {CLEAR <=> :YES} ⇔ {CLEAR <=> :NO} is repeated.If the [ENTER/SET] key is kept on pressing for 5 second when the status of this menu is <YES>,clear process will begin.MTB HOUR METER is cleared only. PANEL HOUR METER is not cleared.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD94

1 2 3 4

N NI F O R

DH M I IS NA LG NI O 1F

RWP 5

T HUA

AM T I O V –D 1 1 10 6 0

A V EC: ITA V EC ITA V EC IT

D EOMS TIBA LVN

A V EC ITA V EC ITA V EC IT

V A LC STVA SKVB SK

:V S Y NC K D TS C D TD C R P T

VC

::::

CTI N T

H ID: M––:

1 40 0 6: 070 4 2 5: 0

40

B 7: 0 3 6 1 F 7 1 45 1 1 E F 2 1 A C D:

N O:x Y C C 7 0 9E X T C O L : vD F A U L TR G B Q R : E

b21P I X D E P : i t

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

– N T V HA– B

Displays the input signal information of HDMI terminal

Item MeaningPWR5V +5 V power detection (18 pin of HDMI terminal)VSYNC VSYNC detectionCKDT Clock detectionSCDT SYNC detection

DCRPT HDCP decryption statusAUTHEN HDCP authentication status

MODE HDMI mode statusBIST ----

NVAL N valueCTSVAL CTS value

AKSV Shadow AKSV valueBKSV Shadow BKSV valueIT CNT IT content (AVI info)

RGV QR RGB range (AVI info)

PIXDEP Number of pixel/bit

EXTCOL Extension calorimetry (AVI info)


1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

95

5 6 7 8

N NI F O R

DH M I IS NA LG NI O 2F

HVHVI

HV

AM T I O V –D 1 1 10 6 0

R E 2S : 2R E 5S : 0D E 9: 1D E 5: 0

00360204

TN R NL : IP O OL : PP O OL : PD IA U 8O : 4

C

TSSkMP

0 b i t2

LOC S P 2 2: 4LOC E T 0 9: 7PSA C T 6 9:: 1TCA V E :maS a p i c tsFV T :291 x 1 i @0 8 0 6 0XIP R P 0: 0UOS C E I O: P E E RNRVD D

MEIeM0

R- T 9 0

– N T V HA– B

Displays input signal status of HDMI terminal

Display of HDMI FACTORY and correspondence of resolutionPlease confirm the following 5 items when the picture doesn't come out.

*1: Confirm if this item is displayed when the audio is not outputted.*2: If may not match to the state of source devices when the color is abnormal.

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

Display Item Meaning

H RES Number of horizontal pixels (decimal)

V RES Number of vertical lines (decimal)H DE Number of effectively horizontal pixels (decimal)

V DE Number of effectively vertical lines (decimal)INTRL Interlace (=INT) or progressive (=PRG)V POL VSYNC polarityH POL HSYNC polarityAUDIO (first line) Sampling frequency. (ex. DVD: 48kHz, CD: 44.1kHz) *1AUDIO (second line) PCM (PCM) or No PCM (=no PCM)AUDIO (third line) Quantization bitCOL SP Color space (AVI Info) (422 or 444 or RGB) *2COLMET N/AASPECT Aspect (AVI Info)ACTIVE Video active format (AVI Info)V FMT Video identification code (AVI Info)PIX RP N/ASOURCE (first line) Vendor name of the emission deviceSOURCE (second line) Model name of the emission device

InputSignal

FACTORY DisplayH RES V RES H DE V DE V FMT

480i (525i) @ 60 858 262 or 263 720 240 720x480i @ 60

480p (525p) @ 60 858 525 720 480 720x480p @60

1080i (1125i) @ 60 2200 562 or 563 1920 540 1920x1080i @ 60

720p (750p) @ 60 1650 750 1280 720 1280x720p @ 60

1080p (1125p) @ 60 2200 1125 1920 1080 1920x1080p @ 60

1080p (1125p) @ 24 2750 1125 1920 1080 1920x1080p @ 24


PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD96

1 2 3 4

N NI F O R

DV E C IS NA LG NI OF

DVM E C

AM T I O V –D 1 3 1

1

0 6 0

– 0 00 : 0– 0 00 : 0– 0 09 : 0– 0 09 : 0– 0 09 : 0– 0 09 : 0– 1 0B : 0– 1 0B : 0– 1 0

014568567B : 0

DVS E C – 4 00 : 0

– 4 09 : 0– 4 09 : 0– 4 09 : 0– – – – – –

0

4– 4 00 : 01

56

– 5 0B : 06– 5 0B : 05

– 5 0B : 07

:

– N T V HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

Displays signal status that is input to VDEC.

DeviceSub Address(Main screen) Meaning

VDEC

000h Line system distinction result001h VTR distinction result094h Slot number095h Color system distinction result096h ACC coefficient098h 3D YC flag1B5h MV detection 11B6h MV detection 21B7h MV detection 3

Sub Address(Sub screen)

400h401h494h495h496h

---5B5h5B6h5B7h


N NI F O R

DV E C IS NA LG NI OF

DVM E C

AM T I O C –B A 3 1

2

0 6 0

– 2 00 : 0– 2 00 : 0– 2 00 : 0– 2 00 : 0– 2 00 : 0

58BCD

DVS E C – 6 00 : 0

– 6 00 : 0– 6 00 : 0– 6 00 : 0

5

B– 6 00 : 08

CD

– D I G HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

Displays signal status that is input to VDEC.

DeviceSub Address(Main screen) Meaning

VDEC

205h CC detection 1208h CC detection 220Bh CC-CRI detection20Ch XDS content advisor 020Dh XDS content advisor 1

Sub Address(Sub screen)

605h608h60Bh60Ch60Dh


1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

97

5 6 7 8

N NI F O R

TD V T NU N GI ATS U ST

BNI A NDOM U LATS T UCGA


1

0 6 0

D ERF Q U E N C Y

ROC R E C DET E R R O RCNU OMIT E

R R EE TC D E R R O R

A TS

I O N7: 6 M5 zH

O: L KC5 %: 8

1 2 3 4 5

A M: Q 5 62

5: 4 e cs7 8: 6

:

– D I G HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

Displays digital broadcast signal information and status upon receiving digital signal.6.2.1.11 DTV TUNING STATUS 1

N NI F O R


ORP G RDIV E O

DIV E O ROF M A TRCP


2

0 6 0

A UNM MB E RP I D

DUA I O P I DP I D

: 3

0: 2 20 1: 2

0 1: 2

0 8: :1 I / 1 6 90

– D I G HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40


N NI F O R


BOOATS T UCGA


3

0 6 0

ERF Q U E N C Y

ROC R E C DET E R R O RCNU OMIT E

R R EE TC D E R R O R

S7: M0 zH

O: LNU KC2 %: 7

1 2 3 4 5

5: 4 e cs7 8: 6

:

– D I G HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40


Exclusively used for production line. TV-Guide error bit ratio information is displayed.6.2.1.14 DTV TV-GUIDE BER

Exclusively used for technical analysis. Debug information for development use is displayed.6.2.1.15 DEBUG INFO

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD98

1 2 3 4

6.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+)

This is the menu screen for the adjustment of the panel. Data acquisition and value adjustment can be performed forthe following items:

No. Indication Description of functions

6.2.2.1 PANEL INFORMATION Data, such as the version of the microcomputer of the panel, product serial number, and statuses of memories for adjustment values for the main unit and for backup, are displayed.

6.2.2.2 PANEL WORKS Operation data, such as accumulated pulse-meter count, accumulated hour-meter count, accumulated power-on count, and the temperature detected by the sensor, are displayed.

6.2.2.3 POWER DOWN The power-down history is displayed, with the hour-meter values that indicate the hour values when power-downs occurred.

6.2.2.4 SHUT DOWN The shutdown history is displayed, with the hour-meter values that indicate the hour values when shutdowns occurred.

6.2.2.5 PANEL-1 ADJ (+) Settings of the driving pulse timing and driving voltage can be performed.

6.2.2.6 PANEL-2 ADJ (+) White balance and ABL (power consumption) for the panel can be set.

6.2.2.7 PANEL FUNCTION (+)Perform panel-degradation correction-level setting, phase adjustment of the address, and the streaking-correction setting.

6.2.2.8 ETC. (+) Copying of backup data and clearance of various data can be performed.

6.2.2.9 RASTER MASK SETUP (+) The mask indication (RASTER) can be set and indicated.

6.2.2.10 PATTERN MASK SETUP (+) The mask indication (PATTERN) can be set and indicated.

6.2.2.11 COMBI MASK SETUP (+) The mask indication (COMBI) can be set and indicated.

Operation Items

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

99

5 6 7 8

Contents of the Display item• PM-B1 to B5: The accumulated pulse-meter counts for the 5 blocks on the screen are indicated. (the lowest-order digit represents millions of pulses.)• HR-MTR: The hour-meter value (accumulated power-on hours) is indicated.• P-COUNT: The accumulated power-on count is indicated.• TEMP1: The current panel temperature and the historical maximum temperature recorded in memory are indicated. The range of temperature indication is from -50.0 to +99.9. (The temperature unit is " °C (Centigrade) ".)

• Data on operations, such as the accumulated pulse-meter counts, hour-meter count, power-on count, and temperature detected by the sensor, are sent back. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no adjustment items.

6.2.2.2 PANEL WORKS

<DOWN> : Shifting to POWER DOWN<UP> : Shifting to PANEL INFORMATION<L/R> : Updating displayed information

g Key operation

Temperature unit is " °C (Centigrade) ".

A .P N E L

AP N E L OW R K S

MP – B 1 0 0 0 10MP – B 2 0 0 0 10

0 750 2

MM6

0 0 0 100 0 0 00

1 586 8

MM8

0 0 0 00 9 6 M2

0 0 0 20 8 2 M0H

MP – B 3MP – B 4MP – B 5

–P C O U TN 0 0 0 00 0 28 IT M SEET M P 1 + 3 8.3 + 7 1.5/

RH – M T R

F A C T1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

6.2.2.1 PANEL INFORMATION• Data, such as the version of the microcomputer of the panel, product serial number, and statuses of memories for adjustment values for the main unit and for backup, are displayed. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no adjustment items.

MODULE : The version of data written in the Module microcomputer (IC3601) is indicated. -PRG : The program version of the Module microcomputer is indicated. -DAT : The data version of the Module microcomputer is indicated.SEQ-PRG : The version of data written in the Sequence LSI (IC3301) is indicated. -PRG : The program version of the Sequence LSI is indicated. -PIC : The Picture-data version of the Sequence LSI is indicated. -SEQ : The sequence-data version of the Sequence LSI is indicated.SERIAL : The serial number of the module is indicated.DIG.EEP : The adjusted status of the EEPROM that is mounted on the DIGITAL Assy is indicated.BACKUP : The adjusted status of the EEPROM for backup that is mounted on the SENSOR Assy is indicated.

• In the following examples, GUI images for a 50-inch and 60-inch models are indicated.

<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL WORKS<UP> : Shifting to COMBI MASK SETUP (+)<L/R> : Updating displayed information

g Key operation

Details of indications in each layer

Display items:

A .P N E L

AP N NE IL F O RN TAM OIDOM U L E

F A C T V –D 1 1 50 6 0

= 0 2 F= 0 2 F= 0 2 F

– P R G––

D A T

0 5 F

GID . E E P A D TJ U S E DA D TJ U S E DCAB K U P

QES P R S = 0 4 Y= 0 4= 0 3 Y

– P R Q– P I C

RES I A L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

– S E Q 6 2 0 Y

0 4 F

– N T V TA– B

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD100

1 2 3 4

Cause of shut-down (MAIN) Cause of shut-down (SUB)Item OSD Indication Item OSD Indication

Communication Error RTRYSQ-NONBUSYVER-HS, VER-MS

Drive StopCommunication Busy

Drive Processing IC SQ_LSI

Version mismatching (H/S) (M/S)MAIN EEPROM Communication Error EEPROMBACKUP EEPROM Communication Error BACKUP

MDU-IIC MD-IIC

DAC1 Communication Error DAC1DAC2 Communication Error DAC2

− −

Panel temperature

Abnormally in RST2 power supply

TMP-NG

RST2

Low temperature of the panel TEMP-LHigh temperature of the panel TEMP-H

<Cause of shut-down and corresponding OSD Indication >

6.2.2.3 POWER DOWN

6.2.2.4 SHUT DOWN

• The power-down history is displayed. The last most 8 power-down histories are displayed with the hour-meter values that indicate the hours when power-downs occurred. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no adjustment items.

• The shutdown history is displayed. The last most 8 shutdown histories are displayed with the hour-meter values that indicate the hours when shutdowns occurred. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no adjustment items.

<DOWN> : Shifting to SHUT DOWN<UP> : Shifting to PANEL WORKS<L/R> : Updating displayed information

g Key operation

<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL-1 ADJ (+)<UP> : Shifting to POWER DOWN<L/R> : Updating displayed information

g Key operation

<Causes of power-down and corresponding OSD indications>

Cause of power-down OSD Indication Cause of power-down OSD Indication

POWER SUPPLY Unit P-PWR

X DRIVE Assy XDRVSCAN Assy SCAN

DC/DC converter for X drive X-DCDC5 V power for SCAN Assy SCAN5V

Y-DRV X-drive SUS circuit X-SUSY DRIVE Assy

DC/DC converter for Y drive Y-DCDC

Y-drive SUS circuit Y-SUS

Digital DC/DC converter D-DCDC

Unknown UNKNOWN

ADDRESS Assy ADRS

* When power-down is confirmed, the factor is displayed as "1st", "2nd", according to the accuracy order.* The power-down history is not recorded when the power-down occurred at the same place and same time.

* When there is detail information when shutdown occurred, the possible defective part is displayed as Sub information.

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

A .P N E L

OP W E R OD WS1 T N2 D

N3 820 00

1 – – – ––2 Y – S SU

X – D VRS C A

–

–

–N

3 S C A N – – – –45

7

P OW RE S C A N– – – –

D–

–C–

–X – D C– – – –

8

6 S C A N 5 VY – D C CD

A D R S

H 0 4 M

1 770 00 H 1 6 M0 140 00 H 4 4 M0 140 00 H 3 2 M0 140 00 H 2 9 M0 310 00 H 4 2 M0 210 00 H 1 1 M0 000 00 H 5 1 M

H M

F A C T V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

A .N E L

H

P

S U T OD WAM I N US B

N3 820 00

1 T E M –P H2 S Q – SL I

S Q –

T M –P N GB U S

H S

Y3 M D – I I C D A C 145

7

S Q – S IL

S IL

V E R –

B U S YB A C K U P

8

6M D – I I C

H 0 4 M

1 770 00 H 1 6 M0 140 00 H 4 4 M0 140 00 H 3 2 M0 140 00 H 2 9 M0 310 000 210 00

H 4 21 1

MH MH MH M

F A C T V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

101

5 6 7 8

6.2.2.5 PANEL-1 ADJ (+)• Timing and voltage for the driving pulse are set. At third line of the screen, the WB (White Balance) table and frequency table indicating operation status are displayed, and at fifteenth line of the screen, the item for the upper nested layer (PANEL-1 ADJ [+]) is displayed. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.

• When the screen is shifted to the next nested layer below, the item of the layer above is indicated at third line of the screen, and the item of the layer below is indicated at fifteenth line.• The configuration of the menu screen is the same for any adjustment item that has lower layers.• To confirm that the change in the SUS FREQ. setting has resulted in diminishing of AM radio interference in this layer, after changing the setting, turn the unit off then back on.

<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL-2 ADJ (+)<UP> : Shifting to POWER DOWN<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer

g Key operation

<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item<UP> : Shifting to the previous item<RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ setting value<LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the adjustment/setting value<VOL+> : Adding by 10 to the adjustment/ setting value<VOL-> : Subtracting by 10 from the adjustment/setting value<SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer

g Key operation

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

A JP N E L – 1 A D )( +

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

O >V L O F TF S E < =

A JP N E L – 1 A D

3: 1 4

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

123456789AB

CDE

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD102

1 2 3 4

<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item<UP> : Shifting to the previous item<RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ setting value<LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the adjustment/setting value<VOL+> : Adding by 10 to the adjustment/ setting value<VOL-> : Subtracting by 10 from the adjustment/setting value<SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer

<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL FUNCTION (+)<UP> : Shifting to PANEL-1 ADJ (+)<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer

g Key operation

g Key operation

• White balance can be adjusted by adjusting R, G, and B gain. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.

Drive sequence and adjustment table

Sequence NameAdjustment ValueTable

Video50

TBL2

6.2.2.6 PANEL-2 ADJ (+)

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

A JP N E L – 2 A D )( +

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

– >R H GI H < =


5: 2 4

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

123456789AB

CDE

Video60

TBL1

Video72

TBL1

Video75

TBL3

PC60

TBL4

The ABL/WB adjustment values are grouped into up to four tables, depending on the drive sequences. The adjustment value for the actually driven table is displayed. The number of the adjustment table and the drive sequence currently selected are displayed on the right side of the third line as the On-Screen display.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

103

5 6 7 8

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

A T I O NP N E L F U N C )( +

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

– >R L VE E L < =

AP N E L

V: L - 3

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

123456789AB

CDE

<DOWN> : Shifting to ETC.(+)<UP> : Shifting to PANEL-2 ADJ (+)<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer

g Key operation

<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item<UP> : Shifting to the previous item<RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ setting value<LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the adjustment/setting value<SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer

g Key operation

• A setting for panel degradation correction can be made. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.

6.2.2.7 PANEL FUNCTION (+)

T I O NF U N C

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD104

1 2 3 4

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

TE C )( +

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

A >B C UK P D TA A < =

TE C .

O: N O P R T

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

123456789AB

CDE

<DOWN> : Shifting to RASTER MASK SETUP (+)<UP> : Shifting to PANEL FUNCTION (+)<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer

g Key operation

<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item<UP> : Shifting to the previous item<RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ setting value<LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the adjustment/setting value<SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer

g Key operation

• The setting about the backup of panel adjusting value and various data on panel operational information can be cleared. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.

6.2.2.8 ETC. (+)

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

105

5 6 7 8

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

AR S T E R M A S K S E T U P )( +

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

SR T M A S K 0 1 0: 6 V

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

123456789AB

CDE

6.2.2.9 RASTER MASK SETUP (+)• This menu set the RASTER MASK and the drive sequence at RASTER MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.

<DOWN> : Shifting to PATTERN MASK SETUP (+)<UP> : Shifting to ETC. (+)<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer

• The MASK indication sequence can be changed among 48V, 50V, 60V, 72V, 75V and 60P using the Right or Left key. The selected sequence and the ABL/WB table are retained until the mask is turned off.

<DOWN> : Shifting to the next MASK<UP> : Shifting to the previous MASK<RIGHT> : Changing MASK sequence (+)<LEFT> : Changing MASK sequence (-)<SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting value and shifting to the upper layer

g Key operation

g Key operation

AR S T E R M A S K S E T U P

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD106

1 2 3 4

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

AP T T E R N M A S K S E T U P )( +

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

TP N M A S K 0 1 0: 6 V

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

123456789AB

CDE


AP T T E R N M A S K S E T U P

6.2.2.10 PATTERN MASK SETUP (+)

<DOWN> : Shifting to COMBI MASK SETUP (+)<UP> : Shifting to RASTER MASK SETUP (+)<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer


g Key operation

g Key operation

• This menu set the PATTERN MASK and the drive sequence at PATTERN MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

107

5 6 7 8

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

OC M B I M A S K S E T U P )( +

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

MC B M A S K 0 1 0: 6 V

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B

V –D 1 1 50 6 0 – N T V TA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

123456789AB

CDE


OC M B I M A S K S E T U P

6.2.2.11 COMBI MASK SETUP (+)

<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL INFORMATION<UP> : Shifting to PATTERN MASK SETUP (+)<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer


g Key operation

g Key operation

• This menu set the COMBI MASK and the drive sequence at COMBI MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD108

1 2 3 4

6.2.3 OPTION

Operation item

6.2.3.1 EDID WRITE MODE <=>Exclusively used for production line.

6.2.3.2 ANTENNA MODE <=>Exclusively used for production line.

6.2.3.3 AFT <=>Exclusively used for production line.

6.2.3.4 SYNC DET (+)Exclusively used for technical analysis (details omitted).

6.2.3.5 CC (+)Exclusively used for technical analysis (details omitted).

No. Function Content RS-232C

6.2.3.1 EDID WRITE MODE <=> DISABLE <=> ENABLE −−−

6.2.3.2 ANTENNA MODE <=> CABLE <=> AIR −−−

6.2.3.3 AFT <=> OFF <=> ON (Controls AFT action) −−−

6.2.3.4 SYNC DET (+) Exclusively used for technical analysis −−−

6.2.3.5 CC (+) Exclusively used for technical analysis −−−

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

109

5 6 7 8

6.2.4 INITIALIZE

NI I T I LA I Z E

I DS E M A S L L +( )K

I N

E V E

V –D 1 3 10 6 0 – N T V HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

To configure sidemask level (To adjust the values, input signal is required).

• To reset each memory values to factory default values. Factory command is "FST".• When the configuration is set to <NO> and the [ENTER/SET] key is pressed, no action is taken and the menu returns to previous screen.• When the configuration is set to <YES> and the [ENTER/SET] key is pressed for 5 seconds, the reset action executes.

Display Content RS-232C

SIDE MASK LEVEL <=> Adjust Side Mask level (Adjustable range: 000 to 255) SML

NI I T I LA I Z E

A TD A R E S TE

I NF A L S E T U P

< = >

V –D 1 3 10 6 0

O: N

– N T V HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

6.2.4.2 FINAL SETUP (+)

6.2.4.1 SIDE MASK LEVEL (+)

Be sure to disconnect and connect the AC cable after FINAL SETUP.When replacing the MAIN Assy, the FINAL SETUP is required.

Operation item

No. Function Content RS-232C

6.2.4.1 SIDE MASK LEVEL (+) Configure the color of the side mask. SML

6.2.4.2 FINAL SETUP (+) Initialize flash memorys on virgin product status FST

6.2.4.3 HMG/HG SERVICE MODE Enter HMG/HG SERVICE MODE −−−

6.2.4.4 Wide XGA AUTO <=> Exclusively used for technical analsyis. −−−

Note: When there is an altered history due to an open TRAP SW, if the "DISPLAY" key is held for at least 5 seconds on the above menu, the altered history will be cleared and the unit will be back to normal.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD110

1 2 3 4

NI I T I LA I Z E

O DM E S H I T =< >F : Y SE

MH G H/ G ES R I CV E O DM E

V –D 1 3 10 6 0 – P B R HA– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

The value of all memorized data are set to shipment status.If the [ENTER] key is kept on pressing for 5 second when the status of this menu is <YES>, HMG/HG SERVICE mode will be done.

6.2.4.3 HMG/HG SERVICE MODE

1. Home Gallery Screen

(1) When the USB device is connected

(2) When the USB device is not connected

HG (Home Gallery) SERVICE MODE (Regular model)

For ELITE modelBe sure to do above procedure at input fuction except HMG.For details, refer to the service manual for the ELITE model.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

111

5 6 7 8

(3) Each item explanation (Example)

1 PTP SupportDisable PTP Non-Support StringEnable PTP Support String

2 T (Topology info)Bus Bus Number DecimalLev Level in topology for this bus DecimalPrnt Parent Device Number Decimal

DecimalPort Connector/Port on Parent for this device

Cnt Count of devices at this level DecimalDev# Device Number DecimalSpd Device Speed in Mbps DecimalMxCh Max Children Decimal

3 D (Device descriptor info)Ver Device USB version HexadecimalCls Device Class HexadecimalSub Device Sub Class HexadecimalProt Device Protocol HexadecimalMxPS Max Packet Size of Default Endpoint Decimal#Cfgs Number Configurations Decimal

4 P (Product ID info)Vendor Vendor ID code HexadecimalProdID Product ID code HexadecimalRev Product revision number Hexadecimal

5 S (String descriptor info - 1)Manufacturer String

6 S (String descriptor info - 2)Product String

String7 S (String descriptor info - 3)

SerialNumber

8 C (Configuration descriptor info)#Ifs Number of Interfaces Decimal#Cfg Configuration Number DecimalAtr Attributes HexadecimalMxPwr MaxPower in mA Decimal

9 I (Interface descriptor info)

If# Interface Number DecimalAlt Alternate Setting Number Decimal#Eps Number of Endpoints DecimalCls Interface Class Hexadecimal(String)Sub Interface Sub Class HexadecimalProt Interface Protocol HexadecimalDriver Driver name String

a E (Endpoint descriptor info)

b E (Endpoint descriptor info)Ad Endpoint Address (I=In, O=Out) Hexadecimal(String)Atr Attributes Hexadecimal(String)MxPS Endpoint Max Packet Size DecimalIvl Interval (max) between transfers Decimal

2. End methodIt is the same as the case that Home Gallery displays.

1

23456789ab

6.2.4.4 Wide XGA AUTO <=>Exclusively used for technical analsyis (details omitted).

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD112

1 2 3 4

7. DISASSEMBLY7.1 FLOWCHART OF REMOVAL ORDER FOR THE MAIN PARTS AND BOARDS

It is efficient to proceed with removal of the main parts and boards in the order shown in the chart below:

Note: Even if the unit shown in the photos and illustrations in this manual may differ from your product, the procedures described here are common.

Flowchart of removal order for the main parts and boards

Power ButtonCase (508F)

1

Side inputcover

1

Function buttonpanel

1

Rear case (508F)

1

Terminal panel B(50U)

3

Terminal panel A(U)

2

Side inputpanel (8U)

SIDE KEY

Fan Holder(Upper central part)

4

Front case Assy(508FU)

FHD FANCONNECT

FHDPOWER SW

TANSHI

50FHD LED FHD RLS FHD IR

SIDE IO

2

Side inputshield

50FX DRIVE

50FY DRIVE

2

Function buttonshield

POD stay A

POWERSUPPLY

5

Multi baseSection

50FDIGITAL

PANELSENSOR

POD

2

MAIN

Front Chassis HT (508F) Assy, Front Chassis HB Assy (50), Panel holder V1 (50), V2 (50),Front chassis VL (508F)

6

50FSCAN A

50FSCAN B

50FSCAN C

50FSCAN D

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

113

5 6 7 8

7.2 DISASSEMBLY

Disassembly

Speaker System

1 Disconnect the speaker cables. When using the hung on wall unit

When using the Pioneer table top stand

2 Remove the three screws.

3 Remove the speaker system.

4 Remove the three brackets by removing the six screws.

3

Speaker system

Bracket

Bracket

Bracket

2

2

2

1

×24

×24

×24

Speaker cable

3

Speaker system

Bracket

BracketBracket

2

2

2

1

×24

×24

×24

Speaker cable

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD114

1 2 3 4

Disassembly

Rear Case (508F)1

1 1

2 4

6

5 5

3 3

1 Remove the two screws.

2 Remove the function button panel.


4 Remove the side input cover.Function button panel Side input cover

Power buttoncase (508F)

SIDE KEY AssyFunction button panel

Side input cover


6 Remove the power button case.

Power button case (508F)

1 Remove the 20 screws. (AMZ30P060FTB)

2 Remove the 10 screws. (TBZ40P080FTB)

3 Remove the two screws. (ABA1332)

4 Remove the one screw. (ABA1341)

5 Remove the rear case (508F).

1 Tighten the two screws.

2 Tighten three screws.

3 Tighten the two screws.

4 Tighten the eight screws.

5 Tighten other screws.

Rear case (508F)Rear case (508F)

5

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

12

2

2

2

3

2

2

2

2

3

2

2

1 1

1

1

1 1 14

1

1 111

When assembling the rear case (508F), tighten the screws in the following sequence:

Tightening sequence for the screws when assembling

-1

2 23 -1

2

1 -2

4-1

4-2

4-3

4-1

4-2

4-3

4-4

4-4

3 -2

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

115

5 6 7 8

×4

Access to PCB Assys2

1 Remove the four screws.



4 Remove the side input panel (8U).

SIDE IO Assy


2 Remove the side input shield with PCB.

50F X DRIVE Assy


2 Remove the function button shield with PCB.

50F Y DRIVE Assy

2

1 1

3 2

111 1

4

2

Side input panel (8U)

Side input shield

Function button shield SIDE KEY Assy

50F Y DRIVE Assy

Sub frame L Assy 507

Capacitor

50F X DRIVE Assy

FHD POWERSW Assy

SIDE IO Assy

1 12

POWER SUPPLYUnitPCB base

NG

OK

FHD FAN CONNECTAssy

• For 50F X DRIVE Assy

• For 50F Y DRIVE Assy

• For SIDE IO Assy

3 Diagnose the 50F Y DRIVE Assy.

3 Diagnose the 50F X DRIVE Assy.

Caution:As the two capacitors on the 50F Y DRIVE Assy are located very close to sub frame L Assy 507, if the former Assy is tilted toward the latter Assy when disassembling, they may come into contact with the latter Assy. Therefore, before removing the 50F Y DRIVE Assy, be sure to tilt the capacitors, as shown in the photo (away from sub frame L Assy 507).

Note:When removing the POWER SUPPLY Unit, be sure to remove not only the POWER SUPPLY Unit but entire PCB base.

50F Y DRIVE Assy

50F Y DRIVEAssy

POWER SUPPLYUnit

Styling of jumper wires around the FAN motor

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD116

1 2 3 4

1 Disconnect cables, connectors, as required.



4 Remove the POD cover.

5 Remove the POD stay A with PCB.

MAIN Assy

4

POD Assy

POD cover

POD stay A 2

3 3

25

How to remove the bridge connector connecting between the MAIN and TANSHI Assys

(1) Grip the two short edges of the connector with longnose pliers.(2) Insert a finger between the longnose pliers and the board to protect the board and the mounted parts on the board from accidental damage by the pliers then, using your finger as a fulcrum and the pliers as a lever, pry the connector upward to remove it. TANSHI Assy MAIN Assy

×4

Terminal Panel B (50U)3



3 Remove the 10 screws.


5 Remove the terminal panel B (50U).5

Terminal panel B (50U)TANSHI Assy Terminal panel A (U)

3

1

3

3

2 2

3

3

33 3

1 2

3 3

4 4 4 4

The wiring shown in the photo is different from the actual wiring, because the product in the photo is a prototype.Upon servicing, be sure to restore the original wiring of the unit after repair work.

Note:

1 Tighten the screw.

2 Tighten the screw.

3 Tighten other screws.

When assembling the terminal panel B (50U), tighten the screws in the following sequence:

Tightening sequence for the screws when assembling

TANSHI Assy MAIN Assy

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

117

5 6 7 8

Front Case Assy (508FU)4

1 Remove the four rivets.

Turn it not to press the rivet.(Because when the rivet presses, fit in once again.)

Rivet

2 Pull the lower part of the Front case Assy (508FU) toward you and out.

3 Remove the Front case Assy (508FU), by pulling it upward.

2

3Front case Assy (508FU)

Front sideWhen assembling the front case, tighten this rivet first.

11

111

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD118

1 2 3 4

Access to 50F DIGITAL Assy5



1 Disconnect the cable. Multi base section

23

1

3

3 3

2

4 Lift the Multi base section to the direction of the arrow. Multi base section

Multi base section PANEL SENSOR Assy

50F DIGITAL Assy

4

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

119

5 6 7 8

Exchange of SCAN IC6



3 Remove the front chassis HT (508F) Assy.

Front chassis HT (508F) Assy

1 Disconnect the two jumper wires.

2 Remove the one screw.

3 Remove the FHD RLS Assy.




7 Remove the front chassis HB Assy (50).

Front chassis HB Assy (50)


2 Unhook the six hooks.

3

3 3

Remove the panel holders V1 (50) and V2 (50).

Panel holder V1 (50), V2 (50)

1

2 2

1

1 1

6

1

5 5

1

11

2

3

7

3

Front chassis HT (508F) Assy

50FHD LED Assy

FHD IRAssy

FHD RLS Assy

4 4

6

2 2 2 2 2 2

Panel holder V2 (50) Panel holder V1 (50)

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD120

1 2 3 4

3

22 2

1

50F Y DRIVE Assy

*

* *

*

50F SCAN AAssy

50F SCAN BAssy

50F SCAN CAssy

50F SCAN DAssy

Front chassis VL (508F)

Exchange

1 Loosen the jumper wire.

2 Remove the three screws.

3 Remove the front chassis VL (508F).

Front chassis VL (508F)

SCAN IC×4

SCAN IC×4

SCAN IC×4

SCAN IC×4

Connecting Method Disconnecting Method

Notes for Three pieces connector 40P*Three pieces connector 40P is a precision part. Pay attention to the handling.

In addition, please do not touch the electrode plane.

OK OK OK

NG NG

NG NG

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

121

5 6 7 8

7.3 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM

SERVICE PRECAUTIONSBe careful in handling this product, because scratches on cabinet coating are easily noticeable.When working on this unit, be sure to place the cabinet on a piece of soft cloth for protection.

(1) Grille AssyThe Grille Assy is secured to the baffle plate with two-sided tape and bosses. When removing the Grille Assy, it is necessary to wear cotton gloves.

- Disassembly1. Insert the tip of your gloved finger into the gap between the Grille Assy in front and the corner of the baffle plate so that the Grille Assy is slightly lifted.

2. Insert the gloved finger to the extent of the second joint into the gap between the cabinet and the Grille Assy.

3. Alternately and gradually lift the left and right sides of the Grille Assy by about 5 cm, sliding gloved fingers along the cabinet. When lifting the Grille Assy, be sure to lift the left and right sides alternately, but not both sides simultaneously.

Note: Be careful not to bend the Grille Assy too far. Otherwise, it may be damaged. OK: Good example NG: Bad example

- ReassemblyRemove the old two-sided tape attached to the rear side of the Grille Assy and the front side of the baffle, and adhere new two-sided tape. Press the bosses into the baffle plate and press the entire grill into position.(Press the bosses from the woofer frame.)

(2) Woofer (Disassembly)The woofer is secured to the baffle plate with four screws from the inside. To remove the woofer, first remove the baffle plate.

- ReassemblyWhen reassembling the woofer, place it so that its + terminal is suitable for the inside. Tighten the screws to the baffle.

(3) Tweeter (Disassembly)The tweeter is secured to the baffle plate with two screws from the inside. To remove the tweeter, first remove the baffle plate.

- ReassemblyWhen reassembling the tweeter, + terminal is in the topside.

Network Assy (Caution)When removing the Network Assy, pull it out a little at a time from alternate sides, because it is seated tightly.

Baffle Assy (Caution)When reassembling the cabinet and the baffle plate, secure the screws in the order shown in the figure below:

Front

Rear

1

1 1

2

2 2

3

3

4 65

Network Assy

1

1

2

Input terminal

Grille Assy

Baffle

Baffle

Grille Assy

OK

NG

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD122

1 2 3 4

8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT

8.1 ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED WHEN THE UNIT IS REPAIRED OR REPLACED

1. At shipment, the unit is adjusted to its best conditions. Normally, it is not necessary to readjust even if an assembly is replaced. If the adjustment is shifted or if it becomes necessary to readjust because of part replacement, etc., perform the adjustment as described below.2. Any value changed in Service/Factory mode will be stored in memory as soon as it is changed. Before readjustment, take note of the original values for reference in case you need to restore the original settings.3. Use a stable AC power supply.

Y DRIVE Assy No adjustment required

Other assemblies No adjustment required

POWER SUPPLY Unit

DIGITAL Assy

X DRIVE Assy No adjustment required

Refer to “8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA” and“8.6 PRECAUTION ON REPLACEMENT OF THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT”.

MAIN Assy (*) No adjustment required

Service Panel Assy Refer to “8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA” and “8.4 ADJUSTMENTS WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL ASSY IS REPLACED”.

Writing of backup data is required. Refer to the “8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY)”.

PANEL SENSOR Assy Writing of backup data is required. Refer to the “8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY)”.

When any of the following assemblies is replaced

Note: Checking the Cable Card IDThe PDP has a slot for a cable card that is used for managing your information by the cable TV company. The following procedure allows you to check your Cable Card ID and the Host ID.1. Press HOME MENU.2. Select “Tuner Setup”. ( / then ENTER)3. Select “Channel Setup”. ( / then ENTER)4. Select “POD ID”. ( / ) • The Host ID and Cable Card ID appear.5. Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

(*) : When replacing the MAIN Assy, be sure to perform the FINAL SETUP.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

123

5 6 7 8

The assembly must be replaced as a unit, and no part replacement is allowed. POWER SUPPLY Unit

MAIN Assy

DIGITAL Assy No adjustment is required after replacement of parts other than those mentioned above.

No adjustment is required after replacement of parts other than those shown in “8.5 ADJUSTMENTS WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED.

No adjustment is required after replacement of parts other than those shown in “8.5 ADJUSTMENTS WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED.

No adjustment is required after replacement of parts other than those mentioned above.

No adjustment is required after replacement of parts other than those mentioned above.

X DRIVE Assy

Y DRIVE Assy

No adjustment requiredTANSHI Assy

ADDRESS Assy No adjustment required

PANEL SENSOR Assy

Notes on replacing partsFor the parts described in the list below, replacement is required for the whole Assy, not only the defective part. If any part listed below is identified as defective and needs replacement, replace the whole Assy, and make necessary adjustments after replacement.

Reason: The whole Assy must be replaced, because adjustments and data rewriting for the Assy at the level of production line are required.

PCB Assy No. Assy NameParts that Require Whole-Assy Replacement

Ref No. Function Name Part No.

AWV2457 MAIN Assy

AWV2510 50F X DRIVE Assy • Parts of X D-D CON BLOCK

AWV2511 50F Y DRIVE Assy • Parts of Y MAIN D-D CON BLOCK 1• Parts of Y MAIN D-D CON BLOCK 2

IC4703 EEPROM BR24L01AFJ-W

IC4801 MAIN VDEC CM0048BF

IC4601 AV switch R2S11006FT

IC4701 RGB switch R2S11001FT

IC5001 A/D Converter AD9985KSTZ-110

IC5102 EEPROM BR24L02FV-W



IC6401 SYSTEM IC BCM7038KPB1G-B2

IC6602 DDR SDRAM K4H561638H-UCB3




IC6902 Flash ROM AGC1057



IC8301 Flash UCOM AGC1037


PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD124

1 2 3 4

8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY)

OutlineAdjustment data are stored in the EEPROM (4K) on the DIGITAL Assy in the production process. Those adjustment data are also automatically stored in the EEPROM (for backup) on the PANEL SENSOR Assy.If the DIGITAL Assy is replaced, those adjustment data for backup can be copied from the EEPROM on the PANEL SENSOR Assy to a new DIGITAL Assy.

Backed up data• Drive voltage adjustment value• Hour-meter count• Pulse-meter count• Panel white balance adjustment value

• Serial No.• Drive waveform adjustment value• P-ON counter value• PD/SD histories

How to copy backup data1. When the DIGITAL Assy is replaced with one for service (usual service)Adjustment data can be restored by copying the data backed up in the PANEL SENSOR Assy to the EEPROM on a new DIGITAL Assy.The EEPROM on the new DIGITAL Assy has no adjustment data, and the EEPROM for backup in the PANEL SENSOR Assy has adjustment data. After replacing the DIGITAL Assy, enter PANEL FACT. mode, display the PANEL INFORMATION page, then check if "NO DATA!" is set for "DIG. EEP" and "ADJUSTED" is set for "BACKUP". Then, proceed in the following steps:

(1) Copying, using the Factory menu1 Plug in the AC cord, press the Power switch on the unit to set it to ON, then enter Standby mode.2 Turn on the power, using the remote control unit, then enter Panel Factory mode. Copy the backup data, as shown in the figure below.

(2) Copying, using the RS-232C commands1 Turn on the unit, using the remote control unit or by issuing the PON command. Then issue the FAY command.2 Issue the BCP command to transfer the data stored in the EEPROM for backup.3 Turn the power off.

3 Turn the power off.• After the DIGITAL Assy is replaced with one for service, be sure to check if "NO DATA!" is set for "DIG. EEP" on the PANEL INFORMATION page of the PANEL FACT. mode.• If copying of the backup data fails in the above procedure, the red LED lights, and the blue LED flashes, as a warning that no backup data were copied.• If both the DIGITAL and PANEL SENSOR Assys are to be replaced, first replace the PANEL SENSOR Assy, turn the unit on and back off again, then replace the DIGITAL Assy.

PANEL INFORMATION

ETC. (+)

BACKUP DATA : NO OPRT

Key Down 7th

SET

Right

SET (5 sec)

BACKUP DATA : TRANSFER

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

125

5 6 7 8

2. When a secondhand DIGITAL Assy that had been mounted in another product is to be reused

As adjustment data for another product are already stored in the secondhand DIGITAL Assy, first delete those data then copy the backup data stored in the EEPROM on the PANEL SENSOR Assy.

(1) Copying, using the Factory menu1 Plug in the AC cord, press the Power switch on the unit to set it to ON, then enter Standby mode.2 Turn on the power, using the remote control unit, then enter Panel Factory mode. Copy the backup data, as shown in the figure below.

(2) Copying, using the RS-232C commands1 Turn on the unit, using the remote control unit or by issuing the PON command. Then issue the FAY command.2 Issue the UAJ command to delete data stored in the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy.3 Issue the BCP command to transfer the data stored in the EEPROM for backup.4 Turn the power off.

3 Turn the power off.Note:If the secondhand DIGITAL Assy is mounted in the product then the unit is turned on then back off again, the data in the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy are copied over the EEPROM in the PANEL SENSOR Assy. Thus the backup data can never be restored. During the first power-on after the DIGITAL Assy is replaced, be sure to enter Factory mode to copy the backup data. Or, before removing the secondhand DIGITAL Assy from the original product, delete the adjustment data on it, using the Factory mode (DIGITAL EEPROM: DELETE), mount it to the product to be repaired, then copy the data from the backup EEPROM.

PANEL INFORMATION

ETC. (+)


Key Down 7th

Key Down

Key Up

SET

Right

Right

SET (5 sec)


DIGITAL EEPROM : NO OPRT

DIGITAL EEPROM : DELETE

SET (5 sec)

BACKUP DATA : TRANSFER

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD126

1 2 3 4

3. In a case where normal backup data are not stored in the backup EEPROM because the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy is defective, etc., and where manually adjusted values are to be applied to the product

Note: In this section, it is assumed that settings for various items have been completed, using Factory menu or RS-232C commands.

(1) Method using the Factory menu1 Set various setting/adjustment values.2 Proceed in the following steps.

(2) Method using the RS-232C commandsIssue the FAJ command.

3 Turn the power off.

Note:When a DIGITAL Assy with an EEPROM in which adjustment data are stored is mounted, this step is not required after manual adjustment. ("DIGITAL EEPROM: REPAIR" is not indicated.)

PANEL INFORMATION

ETC. (+)


Key Down 7th

Key Down

SET

Right

SET (5 sec)


DIGITAL EEPROM : REPAIER

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

127

5 6 7 8

8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA

Clearance of various logs after the Assys are replaced

(1) Clearance of logs, using the RS-232C commands

Besides adjustment data, data on accumulated power-on time and logs on defective parts of the product are backed up. Some of those data must be cleared after the Assys are replaced for service.

Notes: • As the pulse-meter count is used for each correction function, it must be cleared when an Assy relevant to correction functions is replaced. • When clearing logs, using the RS-232C commands, first enter Factory mode (by issuing FAY or PFY), then issue the corresponding command.(2) Clearance of logs, using the Factory menu1 Plug in the AC cord, press the Power switch on the unit to set it to ON, then enter Standby mode.2 Turn on the power, using the remote control unit, then enter Panel Factory mode. Delete various logs, as shown in the figure below.

3 Turn the power off.

PANEL INFORMATION

ETC. (+)




PD INFO. < = > : NO OPRT PD INFO. < = > : CLEAR

MAX TEMP. < = > : NO OPRT

P COUNT INFO. < = > : NO OPRT

PM/B1-B5 < = > : NO OPRT

HR-MTR INFO. < = > : NO OPRT

SD INFO. < = > : NO OPRT

Key Down 7th

Key Down

SET

Right SET (5 sec)

SD INFO. < = > : CLEARRight SET (5 sec)

HR-MTR INFO. < = > : CLEARRight SET (5 sec)

PM/B1-B5 < = > : CLEARRight SET (5 sec)

P COUNT INFO. < = > : CLEARRight SET (5 sec)

MAX TEMP. < = > : CLEARRight SET (5 sec)

Key Down

Key Down

Item Content When the Panelis replaced

When the POWER SUPPLY Unitis replaced

When the Other parts

is replaced

RS-232CCommands

Hour-meter Accumulated power-on time Must be clearedNo need to be

clearedNo need to be

clearedCHM

Pulse-meterAccumulated number of pulses emitted

Must be cleared(mandatory)

No need to be cleared

No need to be cleared

CPM

Shutdown historyCause of an SD and hour-meter count

Must be clearedNo need to be


clearedCSD

Power-down historyCause of an PD and hour-meter count

Must be clearedNo need to be


clearedCPD

Power-on counter Relay-on countNo need to be

clearedMust be cleared

(mandatory)No need to be

clearedCPC

MAX TEMP Historical max. temperature Must be cleared Must be cleared Must be cleared CMT

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD128

1 2 3 4

8.4 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL ASSY IS REPLACED

A .P N E L

L /1[ BT 6 0 V S ]

F A C T

O >V L O F TF S E < =


2: 1 8

I –N 1 3 20 6 0 – RG B HJ– B1

5

10

15

16

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32

123456789AB

CDE

After the panel is replaced with one for service, voltage margin adjustment is required.

Basically, voltage margin adjustment is performed using the Panel Factory menu.After the panel is replaced and the unit is turned on, clear the pulse meter first.For details on how to clear the pulse meter, see "8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA".

∗1: As various corrections are made referring to the pulse-meter count to calculate how long the panel has been used, if adjustment of the panel for service is performed without clearing the pulse-meter count, proper adjustments will not be performed.∗2: The drive sequence for 60-Hz video is used for adjustment. When adjustment is made using the Panel Factory menu, the current drive sequence is displayed on the screen, as shown in the figure below. Make sure that 60VS is always indicated during adjustment.

Example of the On-Screen display during Panel Factory mode

Drive sequence indication

[Preparation]

In the "PANEL-1ADJ" layer, the Panel White Balance value is reset to default, Panel Gamma is set to Straight, Noise is set to OFF, LUT mode is set to ON and Reset active control is set to OFF.In this case, "- - - - /∗∗∗∗" (∗∗∗∗ represents the current drive sequence) is displayed on the third line of the On-Screen display during Panel Factory mode.

If adjustment is performed using RS-232C commands, the following commands must be transmitted for preparation: [PAV S00] : To set panel drive mode to Factory [VFQ S03] : To set Drive Sequence to Video 60-Hz [WBI S01] : To temporarily reset the Panel WB adjustment value to default (WBI S00 cancels this setting.) [PGR S00] : To set the gamma R value to that for Factory mode [PGG S00] : To set the gamma G value to that for Factory mode [PGB S00] : To set the gamma B value to that for Factory mode [DIZ S03] : Dither ON, L dither ON, noise OFF. [$1800000001] : LUT mode ON [$1000003F00] : Reset active control OFF.

∗: If the unit is shut down during the above adjustment flow, resend the above commands from the beginning.

[Supplement]

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

129

5 6 7 8

Overview

Preparation

Clearing of the hour meter and pulse meterAging with RST MASK 01 (White) displayed

NG

FHD signal (1920*1080)/Video 60-Hz sequence/Dither: ON, L dither: ON, noise: OFF

RST MASK 01 (R 1023 /G 1023 /B 1023)White

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

Adjustment completed

RST MASK 02 (R 1023 /G 0 /B 0)RedRST MASK 03 (R 0 /G 1023 /B 0)GreenRST MASK 10 (R 1023 /G 626 /B 1023)PinkRST MASK 12 (R 626 /G 1023 /B 1023)Light blueRST MASK 15 (R 1023 /G 120 /B 120)RST MASK 16 (R 120 /G 1023 /B 120)RST MASK 22 (R 0 /G 169 /B 169)

Red 1023+Green 1023+

Cyan 3SF

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

Definition of tones for the measuring signals

Recovery flowchart (1)(Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage)

OK

(1-1)

(1-2)

(1-3)

(1-4)

(2-1)

(2-2)

(2-3)

Checking VOL OFFSET (min)(RST MASK 12: Light blue)

OK

Checking VOL OFFSET (min)(RST MASK 10: Pink)

OK

Checking VOL OFFSET (max)(RST MASK 02: Red)

OK

Checking VOL OFFSET (max)(RST MASK 03: Green)

Recovery flowchart (1)(Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage)

OK


OK


OK


OK


Recovery flowchart (2)(Changing the VOL YNOFS setting voltage)

OK

Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (max)(RST MASK 22: Cyan 3SF)

OK

Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (min)(RST MASK 16: Green 1023+)

OK

Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 (min)(RST MASK 15: Red 1023+)


OK


OK


OK


Main flowchart (2)(VOL YNOFS check)

OK


OK


OK


Main flowchart (1)(VOL OFFSET check)

OK


OK


OK


OK



OK

Checking VOL YNOFS3/4 (min)(RST MASK 15: Red 1023+)

Note on voltage calculationWhen calculating the setting voltage, round off to get rid of the fractional part.

Range of margin measuringRead the voltage within the hysteresis (stricter value).

Definition of limits for the voltage margins(abnormal lit/dead cells)

Abnormal lit cells:• Five or fewer abnormal cells on the whole screen• Two or fewer abnormal cells within a radius of 1 cm

Abnormal dead cells• Fifteen or fewer abnormal cells on the whole screen• Two or fewer abnormal cells within a radius of 1 cm

∗: Abnormal cells visually recognizable at a distance of 1 meter from the panel must be counted.∗: Cells displayed abnormally for less than one second are not counted as abnormal cells.

V

Read the voltagewithin this range.

Erroneous discharge Adjustmentvalue m+1

Adjustmentvalue m

Adjustmentvalue n

Adjustmentvalue n-1Erroneous discharge

No erroneousdischarge

• Re-replacement of the panel• Replacement of the DRIVE Assy

Replacement with the parts for service

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD130

1 2 3 4

Preparation before adjustment[Replacement with the panel for service is completed.]

[To the Main flowchart (1)]

Turn the unit on. / [PON]

Enter Factory mode. / [FAY]

Set PM/B1-B5 to CLEAR (to clear the pulse meter). / [CPM]

Set HR-MTR to CLEAR (to clear the hour meter). / [CHM]

Turn the unit off. / [POF]

Turn the unit on. / [PON]

Enter Factory mode. / [FAY]

Display RST MASK 01 (white). / [MKS S51]

Select Video 60-Hz sequence. / [VFQ S03] * To store the [VFQ S03] command in memory, transmit it after displaying the mask.

Note: If you perform the adjustment by RS-232C commands, the following commands must be added before going to the main flowchart (1):

[PAV S00] : To set panel drive mode to Factory [VFQ S03] : To set Drive Sequence to Video 60-Hz [WBI S01] : To temporarily reset the Panel WB adjustment value to default (WBI S00 cancels this setting.) [PGR S00] : To set the gamma R value to that for Factory mode [PGG S00] : To set the gamma G value to that for Factory mode [PGB S00] : To set the gamma B value to that for Factory mode [DIZ S03] : Dither ON, L dither ON, noise OFF. [$1800000001] : LUT mode ON [$1000003F00] : Reset active control OFF.

Procedures for resetting corrections for change over time

Perform aging for 5 minutes.

Enter the initial values for the panel for service.

Procedures for stabilizing the panel before adjustment

Note: α V sets adjustment value to 10.

AWV9999- VOF=35V

VRP=170V VY3=184+α V VY4=200

Indication example of the adjustment label of service panel

Data 07/05/24 Chassis CXX99999Time 18:27 Pnl FTEST123456

Hour Meter_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _HVOL SUS (127 fixed) / [VSU 127]VOL OFFSET (VOF adjustment voltage) reduction / [VOF ***]VOL RST P (VRP adjustment voltage) reduction / [VRP ***]VOL XPOFS1 (087 fixed) / [VX1 087]VOL XPOFS2 (140 fixed) / [VX2 140]VOL YNOFS3 (VY3 adjustment voltage) reduction+10 / [VY3 ***]VOL YNOFS4 (VY4 adjustment voltage) reduction / [VY4 ***]VOL YNOFS1 (VY3 adjustment voltage) reduction-21 / [VY1 ***]

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

131

5 6 7 8

Main flowchart (1)...Checking VOL OFFSET

[From Preparation]

Display RST MASK 12 (Light blue). / [MKS S62]

To the Recovery flowchart (1-1)


Set VOL OFFSET to the tentative setting value minus 64. / [VOF ∗∗∗]

No

Yes

Set VOL OFFSET to the tentative setting value plus 48. / [VOF ∗∗∗]

Display RST MASK 10 (Pink). / [MKS S60]

No

Display RST MASK 02 (Red). / [MKS S52]

Display RST MASK 03 (Green). / [MKS S53]

Return VOL OFFSET to the tentative setting value. / [VOF ∗∗∗]

Determine the tentative setting value for VOL OFFSET as the final value.

Yes


No

Yes


From the Recovery flowchart (1-2) and (1-4)

Yes

No


Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)?(Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.)

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)?(Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.)

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)?(Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.)

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)?(Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.)

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD132

1 2 3 4

Main flowchart (2)...Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1

[From the Main flowchart (1)]

Display RST MASK 16 (Green 1023+). / [MKS S66]

Display RST MASK 15 (Red 1023+). / [MKS S65]

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the tentative setting value minus 23. / [VY3 ***]

No

No

No



Return the VOL YNOFS3 to the tentative setting value. / [VY3 ***]


Determine the tentative setting value for VOL YNOFS3 as the final value.Determine the tentative setting value for VOL YNOFS4 as the final value.Determine the tentative setting value for VOL YNOFS1 as the final value.

From the Recovery flowchart (2-1) and (2-3)

Note:Make sure that the following values become the final setting values.VOL SUS *1 VOL XPOSF2 *1VOL OFFSET VOL YNOFS1VOL RST P *1 VOL YNOFS3VOL XPOFS1 *1 VOL YNOFS4

*1: The tentative setting value becomes the final value.

To the Recovery flowchart (2-1)YesIs there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)?

(Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.)

Display RST MASK 22 (Cyan 3SF). / [MKS S72]

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the tentative setting value plus 23. / [VY3 ***]




To the Recovery flowchart (2-3)YesIs there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)?


To the Recovery flowchart (2-2)YesIs there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)?


[Adjustment completed]

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

133

5 6 7 8

Recovery flowchart (1-1)...Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage


RST MASK 12 (Light blue)


[From the Main flowchart (1) / Recovery flowchart (1-1)]

RST MASK 10 (Pink)


Replacement of abnormal circuits or re-replacement of the panel required

No

Yes

Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value plus 112. / [VOF ***]

Gradually increase the VOL OFFSET value until disappear the discharge (lit cell).The VOL OFFSET value must be 133 or less.

Current VOL OFFSET > 133?

[To the Recovery flowchart (1-2)]

Display RST MASK 02 (Red). / [MKS S52]



No

Yes

Gradually increase the VOL OFFSET value until disappear the discharge (lit cell).The VOL OFFSET value must be 133 or less.

No

YesIs there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)?(Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.)

A

Current VOL OFFSET > 133?

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD134

1 2 3 4


[From the Main flowchart (1) ]


Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value minus 48. / [VOF ***]



Determine the current VOL OFFSET setting value as the final value.



No

Yes

Gradually decrease the VOL OFFSET value until disappear the discharge (dead cell).The VOL OFFSET value must be 117 or greater.

Current VOL OFFSET < 117?

No



A

RST MASK 02 (Red)

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

135

5 6 7 8



RST MASK 03 (Green)

Display RST MASK 12 (Light blue). / [MKS S62]



No

Yes

Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value minus 112. / [VOF ***]

Gradually decrease the VOL OFFSET value until disappear the discharge (dead cell).The VOL OFFSET value must be 117 or greater.

Current VOL OFFSET < 117?


Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value plus 64. / [VOF ***]

Determine the current VOL OFFSET setting value as the final value.


No



No


PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD136

1 2 3 4

Recovery flowchart (2-1)...Changing the VOL YNOFS3/4/1 setting voltage


Set VOL YNOFS1 to the tentative setting value. / [VY1 ***]

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value +4. / [VY3 ***]



No

Yes

Yes


From the Recovery flowchart (2-2)

Yes

Current VOL YNOFS3 setting value > 137?

No

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)?

No



Display RST MASK 22 (Cyan 3SF). / [MKS S72]



RST MASK 16 (Green 1023+)


No

YesIs there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)?(Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.)

B

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

137

5 6 7 8

Recovery flowchart (2-2)...Changing the VOL YNOFS3/4 setting voltage

Determine the current setting value for VOL YNOFS3 as the final value.Determine the current setting value for VOL YNOFS4 as the final value.

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value minus 23. / [VY3 ∗∗∗]

Set VOL YNOFS4 to the current setting value minus 23. / [VY4 ∗∗∗]

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value plus 4. / [VY3 ∗∗∗]

Set VOL YNOFS1 to the current setting value. / [VY1 ∗∗∗]

Set VOL YNOFS4 to the current setting value plus 4. / [VY4 ∗∗∗]


B

[Adjustment completed]

Set VOL YNOFS1 to the final setting value of VOL YNOFS3 minus 31. / [VY1 ∗∗∗]

Determine the current VOL YNOFS1 setting value as the final value.

VOL YNOFS3 final setting value

Note: Make a note of this VOL YNOFS3 value.



No

Yes

Yes

Current VOL YNOFS3 setting value > 137?

No


RST MASK 15 (Red 1023+)

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD138

1 2 3 4

Recovery flowchart (2-3)...Changing the VOL YNOFS3/4/1 setting voltage


Set VOL YNOFS1 to the tentative setting value. / [VY1 ***]

Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value minus 4. / [VY3 ***]



No

Yes

Yes

Current VOL YNOFS3 setting value < 094?

No

Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)?



Set VOL YNOFS3 to the current setting value plus 23. / [VY3 ***]

Set VOL YNOFS4 to the current setting value plus 23. / [VY4 ***]



RST MASK 22 (Cyan 3SF)

Display RST MASK 16 (Green 1023+). / [MKS S66]

No



No


Determine the current setting value for VOL YNOFS3 as the final value.Determine the current setting value for VOL YNOFS4 as the final value.


Set VOL YNOFS1 to the final setting value of VOL YNOFS3 minus 31. / [VY1 ***]

Determine the current VOL YNOFS1 setting value as the final value.

VOL YNOFS3 final setting value

Note: Make a note of this VOL YNOFS3 value.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

139

5 6 7 8

Setting Voltages

VOF VRP VY1 VY3 VY4Vysnofs (V) Vyprst (V) Vyknofs1,2 (V) Vyknofs3 (V) Vyknofs4 (V)

14 000 146 002 161 001 151 001 151 001

15 005 147 003 162 003 152 003 152 003

16 011 148 005 163 005 153 005 153 005

17 016 149 007 164 008 154 008 154 008

18 021 150 009 165 010 155 010 155 010

19 027 151 011 166 012 156 012 156 012

20 032 152 013 167 014 157 014 157 014

21 037 153 014 168 016 158 016 158 016

22 043 154 016 169 018 159 018 159 018

23 048 155 018 170 020 160 020 160 020

24 053 156 020 171 022 161 022 161 022

25 059 157 022 172 025 162 025 162 025

26 064 158 024 173 027 163 027 163 027

27 069 159 025 174 029 164 029 164 029

28 075 160 027 175 031 165 031 165 031

29 080 161 029 176 033 166 033 166 033

30 085 162 031 177 035 167 035 167 035

31 091 163 033 178 037 168 037 168 037

32 096 164 035 179 040 169 040 169 040

33 101 165 036 180 042 170 042 170 042

34 107 166 038 181 044 171 044 171 044

35 112 167 040 182 046 172 046 172 046

36 117 168 042 183 048 173 048 173 048

37 123 169 044 184 050 174 050 174 050

38 128 170 046 185 052 175 052 175 052

39 133 171 047 186 054 176 054 176 054

40 139 172 049 187 057 177 057 177 057

41 144 173 051 188 059 178 059 178 059

42 149 174 053 189 061 179 061 179 061

43 155 175 055 190 063 180 063 180 063

44 160 176 057 191 065 181 065 181 065

45 165 177 058 192 067 182 067 182 067

46 171 178 060 193 069 183 069 183 069

47 176 179 062 194 072 184 072 184 072

48 181 180 064 195 074 185 074 185 074

49 187 181 066 196 076 186 076 186 076

50 192 182 068 197 078 187 078 187 078

51 197 183 069 198 080 188 080 188 080

52 203 184 071 199 082 189 082 189 082

53 208 185 073 200 084 190 084 190 084

54 213 186 075 201 086 191 086 191 086

55 219 187 077 202 089 192 089 192 089

56 224 188 079 203 091 193 091 193 091

57 229 189 080 204 093 194 093 194 093

58 235 190 082 205 095 195 095 195 095

59 240 191 084 206 097 196 097 196 097

60 245 192 086 207 099 197 099 197 099

61 251 193 088 208 101 198 101 198 101

62 255 194 090 209 104 199 104 199 104

196 093 210 106 200 106 200 106

197 095 211 108 201 108 201 108

198 097 212 110 202 110 202 110

199 099 213 112 203 112 203 112

200 100 214 114 204 114 204 114

201 102 215 116 205 116 205 116

202 104 216 118 206 118 206 118

203 106 217 121 207 121 207 121

204 108 218 123 208 123 208 123

205 110 219 125 209 125 209 125

206 111 220 127 210 127 210 127

207 113 221 129 211 129 211 129

208 115 222 131 212 131 212 131

209 117 223 133 213 133 213 133

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD140

1 2 3 4

Setting Voltages

VRP VY1 VY3 VY4Vyprst (V) Vyknofs1,2 (V) Vyknofs3 (V) Vyknofs4 (V)

210 119 224 136 214 136 214 136

211 121 225 138 215 138 215 138

212 122 226 140 216 140 216 140

213 124 227 142 217 142 217 142

214 126 228 144 218 144 218 144

215 128 229 146 219 146 219 146

216 130 230 148 220 148 220 148

217 132 231 150 221 150 221 150

218 133 232 153 222 153 222 153

219 135 233 155 223 155 223 155

220 137 234 157 224 157 224 157

221 139 235 159 225 159 225 159

222 141 236 161 226 161 226 161

223 143 237 163 227 163 227 163

224 144 238 165 228 165 228 165

225 146 239 168 229 168 229 168

226 148 240 170 230 170 230 170

227 150 241 172 231 172 231 172

228 152 242 174 232 174 232 174

229 154 243 176 233 176 233 176

230 155 244 178 234 178 234 178

231 157 245 180 235 180 235 180

232 159 246 183 236 182 236 182

233 161 247 185 237 185 237 185

234 163 248 187 238 187 238 187

235 165 249 189 239 189 239 189

236 166 250 191 240 191 240 191

237 168 251 193 241 193 241 193

238 170 252 195 242 195 242 195

239 172 253 197 243 198 243 198

240 174 254 200 244 200 244 200

241 176 255 202 245 202 245 202

242 177 256 204 246 204 246 204

243 179 257 206 247 206 247 206

244 181 258 208 248 208 248 208

245 183 259 210 249 210 249 210

246 185 260 212 250 212 250 212

247 187 261 214 251 214 251 214

248 188 262 217 252 217 252 217

249 190 263 219 253 219 253 219

250 192 264 221 254 221 254 221

251 194 265 223 255 223 255 223

252 196 266 225 256 225 256 225

253 198 267 227 257 227 257 227

254 199 268 229 258 229 258 229

255 201 269 232 259 232 259 232

256 203 270 234 260 234 260 234

257 205 271 236 261 236 261 236

258 207 272 238 262 238 262 238

259 209 273 240 263 240 263 240

260 210 274 242 264 242 264 242

261 212 275 244 265 244 265 244

262 214 276 246 266 246 266 246

263 216 277 249 267 249 267 249

264 218 278 251 268 251 268 251

265 220 279 253 269 253 269 253

266 221 280 255 270 255 270 255

VRPVyprst (V)

267 223

268 225

269 227

270 229

271 231

272 232

273 234

274 236

275 238

276 240

277 242

278 243

279 245

280 247

281 249

282 251

283 253

284 254

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

141

5 6 7 8

8.5 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED

TIME LAG ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTROL SIGNAL (SUS-B)

1 Measure the time lag for the SUS-U signal to the SUS-B signal.2 Check the time lag for the SUS-B Gate signal to the SUS-U Gate siganl. Adjust the variable control so that the time lag of Gate becomes " time lag of input signal + α ± 5 nsec."Note: For details on measuring points of waveform, see the figure below.

50 % of the crest value

5 V position

5 V position

Time lag of SUS-U Gate and SUS-B Gate : Δ Tsus - gubAdjust so that "Δ Tsus - gub = Δ Tsus - iub + α ± 5 nsec," using the variable controls shown in the table below:

SUS-U signal (input to the DRIVE Assy)

SUS-B signal (input to the DRIVE Assy)

SUS-U Gate signal

SUS-B Gate signalX DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q1220)Y DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q2217)

X DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q1109)Y DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q2107)

50 % of the crest value

time lag of SUS-U and SUS-BΔ Tsus-iub

time lag of SUS-U Gate and SUS-B Gate Δ Tsus - gub

Assy VR Value of α

X DRIVE Assy VR1002 70 nsec

Y DRIVE Assy VR2002 60 nsec

Waveform adjustments required when replacing the following parts of the X DRIVE and Y DRIVE Assys.

Assy Name Ref No. Part Name Part Category Remarks

X DRIVE Assy IC1101 PS9117AP Photo Coupler

IC1104 TND307TD FET Driver

IC1204 PS9117AP Photo Coupler


Y DRIVE Assy IC2101 PS9117AP Photo Coupler



IC2201 PS9117AP Photo Coupler


PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD142

1 2 3 4

DELAY ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTROL SIGNAL (SUS-D)

1 Measure the pulse width of the SUS-D signal.2 Check the pulse width of the SUS-D input signal (gate terminal of Q2111). Adjust the variable control so that the pulse width of the SUS-D input signal (gate terminal of Q2111) becomes the same pulse width ± 5 nsec as the SUS-D signal.Note: • Be sure to set the Drive to OFF for adjustment. • For details on measuring points of waveform, see the figure below.

50 % of the crest value 50 % of the crest value

50 % of the crest value 50 % of the crest value

SUS-D pulse width: Tsus - DgAdjust so that "Tsus - Dg = Tsus - D ± 5 nsec," using the variable control shown in the table below:

SUS-D signal (input to the DRIVE Assy)

SUS-D signal(input to the gate terminal of Q2111)

SUS-D pulse widthTsus - D

SUS-D pulse widthTsus - Dg

Assy VR

Y DRIVE Assy VR2001

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

143

5 6 7 8

SUS-B ADJUSTMENT

X DRIVE Assy

SUS-D ADJUSTMENT

XSUS-U

fromDIGITAL Assy

IC1002_A1

Pin2

Pin2

Pin8

IC1101

IC1204

IC1104 Q1116IGBTQ1104

TP1127

TP2105

PhotoCoupler

Q1108IGBT

TP1119

Q1219FET

TP1204

Q1220FET

TP1205

Q1221FET

TP1206

1 Measure the SUS-U and SUS-B input delay time (Δ Tsus - iub).

fromDIGITAL Assy

XSUS-B

IC1001_A1

VR1002

PhotoCoupler

IC1209

Q1205

Q1206

Q1207

2 Adjust the SUS-U and SUS-B input delay time so that it becomes "Δ Tsus - iub + 70 ± 5 nsec."

Q1218FET

TP1258Q1204

Y DRIVE Assy

Y DRIVE Assy

1 Measure the SUS-D pulse width (Tsus - D).

2 Adjust the pulse width (Tsus - Dg) of the SUS-D input signal so that it becomes "Tsus-D ± 5 nsec."

fromDIGITAL Assy

YSUS-D

IC2005_A7 Q2105

VR2001 IC2104Q2111IGBT

TP2114

Q2113IGBT

TP2116

YSUS-U

fromDIGITAL Assy

IC2001_A4

Pin5

IC2101

IC2103

Q2106IGBT

Q2107IGBT

Q2104

PhotoCoupler

TP2106

TP2107

Q2108IGBT

TP2108

Q2109IGBT

Pin7

IC2201

Q2217FET

TP2204

Q2218FET

TP2205

Q2219FET

TP2206

1 Measure the SUS-U and SUS-B input delay time (Δ Tsus - iub).

fromDIGITAL Assy

YSUS-B

IC2001_A6

VR2002

PhotoCoupler

IC2203

Q2204

Q2205

Q2206

2 Adjust the SUS-U and SUS-B input delay time so that it becomes "Δ Tsus - iub + 60 ± 5 nsec."

Q2220FET

TP2207Q2207

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD144

1 2 3 4

8.6 PRECAUTION ON REPLACEMENT OF THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Attachment of the housing wire

The housing wire (J126) is attached to the P11 terminal of the POWER SUPPLY unit. As the housing wire is not provided with the POWER SUPPLY unit for service, when replacing the POWER SUPPLY unit, remove the housing wire (J126) from the old one and attach it to the new one.NEVER turn on the unit before replacement, as doing so may damage the PC boards or the product.

POWER SUPPLY unit

POWER SUPPLY unit (old) POWER SUPPLY unit (new)

P11 P11

1

1

2

Housing wire (J126) Housing wire (J126)

Disconnect the housing wire (J126) from the P11 terminalon the old POWER SUPPLY Unit.

2 Connect the housing wire (J126) to the P11 terminalon the new POWER SUPPLY Unit.

Note: The wiring shown in the photo is different from the actual power supply unit, because the product in the photo is a prototype.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

145

5 6 7 8

9. RS-232C9.1 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND9.1.1 PREPARED TOOLS

9.1.2 USING RS-232C COMMANDS

It is necessary to prepare the following one to use 232C command.• PC• Application for control• 232C cable (straight)∗ The setting of the Com port cannot be communicated if it doesn't do correctly. (Please follow a set explanation of PC in the Com port)

Individual ports are provided for RS-232C and SR+ connectors with this model. Therefore, unlike the case of previous models, which required switching of exclusive operation between these connectors on the Integrator menu, switching is no longer required.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD146

1 2 3 4

9.2 LIST OF RS-232C COMMANDS

Command Name Function

Effective onlyin Factory

mode

ActiveU-com Last

MemoryRemarks

ABL ∗∗∗ Adjusting the upper limit of the power %

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%%

%%

%%

%%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

APW S00 APL interlocked function: OFF

S01

S00

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod UP*/DN* is not effective

UP*/DN* is not effective





S01

APL interlocked function: ON

%%S02 APL interlocked WB: ON / APL interlocked γ : OFF

%%S03 APL interlocked WB: OFF / APL interlocked γ : ON

BSM S00 After image/Burning safe mode: OFF

S01 After image/Burning safe mode: ON

BCP

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

Copying the backup data in the EEPROM

BHI ∗∗∗

∗∗∗

S∗∗

S∗∗

User white balance : BLUE highlight

BLW User white balance : BLUE lowlight

BRT User brightness

CBU Clearing backup data of EEPROM

CHM Clearing data of the hour meter

CHN Changing tuner preset channel (1 step forward)

Changing tuner preset channel (1 step reverse)

CHR Clearing data of the hour meter of MTB side

CNT User contrast

CMT Clearing data of the maximum temperature

CPC Clearing power-on count data

CPD Clearing power-down histrory

CPM Clearing data of the pulse meter

CSD Clearing shutdown history

CTM Releasing the TRAP SW

DW*To subtract ∗∗∗ to the adjustment value (∗∗∗ = 000 to 999, designated by a function command)

DRV

DIZ

S00

REV

FWD

Panel drive-power OFF

S00 Dither/L dither OFF & noise OFF

S01 Dither/L dither ON & noise ON

S02 Dither/L dither OFF & noise ON

S03 Dither/L dither ON & noise OFF

S01 Panel drive-power ON

A

MDU

B

C

D

MTB

AMT Audio mute OFF

AP0 ADDRESS L1, L2 setting

AP1 ADDRESS L3, L4 setting

%% ModS∗∗AP3 ADDRESS U3, U4 setting

%% ModS∗∗AP2 ADDRESS U1, U2 setting

APN 1V average pulse number setting

Audio mute ON

RS-232C command list

RS-232C commands can be used in Service Factory mode. Before using RS-232C commands, it is necessary to change the factory presetting. See "9.1 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND".[Note ; If you want to see version infomation (ex. QS1, QSE, Factory, Menu), Please see 10 seconds after starting.]

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

147

5 6 7 8



mode

ActiveU-com Last

MemoryRemarks

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

MDU MTB

INA ∗∗∗ Switching the terrestrial analog signal (ANTENNA A) (∗∗∗: channel number)

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

Switching the terrestrial digital signal (ANTENNA A)(∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗: channel number)

Switching to the ANTENNA A

INH Switching the HomeGallery (Home Media Gallery for the ELITE model)

INP Input switch: INPUT 1

∗∗∗INB Switching the terrestrial analog signal (ANTENNA B)(∗∗∗:channel number)

Switching to the ANTENNA B

Input switch: INPUT 2






M

MKC Panel mask indication off

H ramp (slant 1) M

H ramp (slant 4) M

Slanting ramp M

30 for aging

05 for aging

S06

S00

S01

S02

S03

S04

S05

S06

S07

%Input switch: INPUT 8 (PC)S08

S01

S02

S03

%

%

%

%

MIR Mirror mode: OFF (default)

Mirror mode: Right and left inversion

Mirror mode: Top and bottom inversion

Mirror mode: Top and bottom and right and left inversion

S00

S01

S02

S03

S04

S05

Erasing afterimage 1

S07 Erasing afterimage 2

S08 White (change in luminance level)

S09 PEAK detection raster

MKS

S10 Address lack check

%% ModS11 Green vertical line scroll

%% ModS12 Green horizontal line scroll

%% ModS13 Vertical ramp vertical scroll (white)

%% ModS14 Vertical ramp vertical scroll (green)

%% ModS15 Horizontal ramp horizontal scroll (white)

%% ModS16 Horizontal ramp horizontal scroll (green)

%% ModS17 Cross hatch + window

S00 MASK OFF

S01 H ramp (slant 1)

S02 H ramp (slant 4)

%

%∗∗∗

∗∗∗

GHI User white balance : GREEN highlight

GLW User white balance : GREEN low light

G

I

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%FAJDetermining the flag of the DIGITAL Assy adjustment in "adjustment is completed"

FAN

FAY Factory mode ON

Factory mode OFF

FST Set each memory setting of MTB side to the shipment state.

F



PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD148

1 2 3 4

%

%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod

Mod

S03 V ramp (slant 1)

S04

S05

Slanting ramp

Window (Hi= 870, Lo= 102)



mode

ActiveU-com Last

MemoryRemarks

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

MDU MTB

MKS

B & W, checker (4 lines)


Slanting lines

COLOR BAR

Red & black, checker (1 line)

Red & black, checker (2 lines)

S21

S15

S16

S17

S18

S19

S20

Red & black, checker (4 lines)

S22 Red & black, checker (8 lines)

S23 Erasing afterimage (RGB: zigzag, V: reverse)

S24 SUS 2000 pulses (black raster)

S25 1 for perfect linear




S29 RGB checker 1

S30

S31

S32

S33

S34

S35

S36

S37

S38

S39

RGB checker 2

Window GREEN (GREEN=1023)

Even line horizontal stripes

Window BLUE (BLUE=1023)

Window RED (RED=1023)

Afterimage check 2

Afterimage check 4

%% ModS40 Red single-color slanting ramp

%% ModS41 GREEN single-color slanting ramp

%% ModS42 BLUE single-color slanting ramp

%% ModS43 For panel light check 1

%% ModS44 For panel light check 2

%% ModS45 5 for perfect linear




%% Mod

%% Mod

S49 Mask for ABL adjustment

Afterimage check 3

Odd line horizontal stripes

Afterimage check 1

Raster - White

Raster - Red

Raster - Green

S51

S52

S53

M

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%%

%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

S06

S07

S08

S09

S10

S11

S12

S14

Window (Hi= 1023, Lo=000)

Window (Hi= 1023, Lo= 102)

Window (Hi= 1023) 4 %

STRIPE (MGT/GRN)


STRIPE (GRN/MGT)

S13 B & W, checker (1 line)

Window (Hi= 1023) 1.25 %

Window (1/7 LINE)

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

149

5 6 7 8

�

��

�

Mod

Mod

Raster - Blue

Raster - Black

S54

S55



mode

ActiveU-com Last

MemoryRemarks

MDU MTB

NGP

MKS

S00

S00

Negative positive inversion: OFF (default)

S01 Negative positive inversion: ON

PAV Panel drive mode (FACTORY)

P

�

S01 Panel drive mode (STANDARD) �S02 Panel drive mode (DYNAMIC) �S03 Panel drive mode (MOVIE) �S04 Panel drive mode (GAME) �

S05 Panel drive mode (SPORTS) �

S06 Panel drive mode (PURE) �S07 Panel drive mode (USER) �

S08 Panel drive mode (ISF-DAY) �

S09 Panel drive mode (ISF-NIGHT) �S10 Panel drive mode (OPTIMUM �

Main

Main

N

OSD S00 Turning OSD setting to off

S01 Turning OSD setting to on

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

O

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Raster - Cyan

S57

S56

Raster - Magenta

S58 Raster - Yellow

S59 Raster - Pink

S60 Raster - Cyan 291

S61 Raster - Yellow egg color

S62 Raster - Light blue

MST Display one screen

S01

S00

PsideP (Main size: normal)

S02 PinP (Right down)

S03 PinP (Right up)

S04 PinP (Left up)

S05 PinP (Left down)

S08 SWAP (Exchanging sub-screen)

S63 Raster - Beige

S64 Raster - Gray 291

S65 Raster - Red 1023+

S66

S67

S68

S69

S70

S71

S72

S73

S74

Raster - Green 1023+

Raster - Red 626

Raster - Blue 626

Raster - Green 626

Raster - Blue 1023+

Raster - Magenta 3SF

Raster - Yellow 3SF

��

�

�

ModS75 Raster - Gray 307

Raster - Gray 2SF

Raster - Cyan 3SF

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD150

1 2 3 4

PDM S00 Passing PD signals to the POWER SUPPLY Unit => Power-down

S01 Not passing PD signals to the POWER SUPPLY Unit => No power-down

PFL S00 Peripheral luminance correction: OFF

S01 Peripheral luminance correction: ON fixed

S02 Peripheral luminance correction: APL interlocked ON (default)

PES S00 For general-purpose commonness: Standard

S01 For general-purpose commonness: Energy saving 1

S02

S00

S00

For general-purpose commonness: Energy saving 2

Factory mode: OFF

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

PBH Panel white balance adjustment - Blue highlight

PBL Panel white balance adjustment - Blue low light

PFN

PFS Setup at shipment

PFY Factory mode: ON

PGB Blue-independent gamma setting: Straight

PGG Green-independent gamma setting: Straight

%

During PFY

%

%%

%

%%

%%

PFM S00 It does not return the hierarchy character of the panel factory

S01 It returns the hierarchy character of the panel factory

%%

%%

%%

%

%

%

S10 For general-purpose Japan standard: Standard

S11 For general-purpose Japan standard: Standard

%

%

S12 For general-purpose Japan standard: Standard %

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod



mode

ActiveU-com Last

MemoryRemarks

MDU MTB

P

S01 Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.6


%

%



%

%



%

%

S07 Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.2 (default)


%

%

S10-31 Blue-independent gamma setting: Customize %

S09 Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.4 %

S01 Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.6


%

%



%

%



%

%

S07 Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.2 (default)


%

%

S10-31 Green-independent gamma setting: Customize %

S09 Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.4 %

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

PGH Panel white balance adjustment - Green highlight

PGL Panel white balance adjustment - Green low light %

%%

%

Mod

Mod



1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

151

5 6 7 8

S00PGR Red-independent gamma setting: Straight %



mode

ActiveU-com Last

MemoryRemarks

MDU MTB

QSI Acquiring data related with signals

P

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

PON Power ON

PRH Panel white balance adjustment - Red highlight

PRL Panel white balance adjustment - Red low light

Power OFFPOF

PUC S00 Pure cinema: off

S01 Pure cinema: Standard

S02 Pure cinema: Advance

PPT S00 Panel protection: OFF

S01 Panel protection: ON %

%

%

%

%

%

%

S00

S00

S01

PKD Peak luminance detection: OFF

Peak luminance detection: ON

Panel brightness setting No brightness limitation : 100 % (default)PKL

%

%

%

%

%

% %

%

%%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

% %

%

%

%

%

%

%

S03 Pure cinema: Smooth %%

Mod

Mod

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

% % Main

QSP Acquiring the software sub-version of the microcomputer at panel side

QAJ

QMT

QNG

QPD

QPM

Acquiring various adjustment values

Acquiring temperature of MTB side and Fan speed

Acquiring shutdown information of MTB side

Acquiring logs of power-down points

Acquiring data of the pulse meter

Acquiring panel white balance adjustment values

Each information output for panel

QPW

QS1 Acquiring unit data, such as the software version common to all models, regardless of destination

QS3

%Acquiring data on the status of the unit, such as temperatureQS2

QSE Acquiring unit data, such as the software version common to all models, regardless of destination

QSD Acquiring data on shutdown

Q

S01 Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.6


%

%



%

%



%

%

S07 Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.2 (default)


%

S01 Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 1 : 87 %


%

%



%

%



%

%

S07 Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 7 : 13 % %

%

S10-31 Red-independent gamma setting: Customize %

S09 Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.4 %

S00PMT Canceling panel muting

S01 Panel muting

%%



PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD152

1 2 3 4

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

S00

RHI User white balance - Red highlight

RLW User white balance - Red low light

RBL

R2K

BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: Lv0 (no correction) %

%

%

% Mod

∗∗∗ First reset (wedge width)

∗∗∗ Second reset (wedge width)

R1K

%

%%

%

Mod

Mod



mode

ActiveU-com Last

MemoryRemarks

MDU MTB

S00

S01

S01

S02

S03

S04

S05

S06

S07

Shutdown enabled

S08

SDM

SFR

Shutdown prohibited

Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 1








S

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

S01

S02

S03

S04

S05

S06

S07

BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV1







%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

S00RGL GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: Lv0 (no correction) %% Mod

S01

S02

S03

S04

S05

S06

S07

GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV1







%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

S00RLS Room light sensor operation : OFF %

S01

S02

S03

S04

S05

Room light sensor operation : 1





%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod

S00RRL RED setting for panel degradation correction: Lv0 (no correction) %% Mod

S01

S02

S03

S04

S05

S06

S07

RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV1







%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

R





1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

153

5 6 7 8

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

SML Adjustment of the side mask level

SN0 Setting of the serial No. 0 (panel)

Setting of the serial No. 1 (panel)

SN2

SN3

SN4

Setting of the serial No. 2 (panel)

UAJ

SN1

Determining the flag for the DIGITAL Assy adjustment in "not adjusted"

∗∗∗ Setting of the serial No. 3 (panel)

∗∗∗ Setting of the serial No. 4 (panel)

UP∗

SZM

To add ∗∗∗ to the adjustment value (∗∗∗ = 000 to 999, designated by a function command)

S00

S01

S00

S01

S02

S03

Setting the screen size to Dot by Dot

Setting the screen size to 4 :3

Setting the screen size to ZOOM

Setting the screen size to WIDE

Setting the screen size to FULL

S04

S05

Setting the screen size to CINEMA

U

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

S00SMM Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: All screen detection (default) %%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

S00

S01

S02

S03

S04

S05

S06

S07

SKM STREAKING correction mode OFF

STREAKING correction mode 1







%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%%

%

%

S01

S03

Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: 4:3 detection

Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: D-BY-D detection VGA

%

S02 Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: 14:9 detection %

S04 Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: D-BY-D detection SVGA %

%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod

S01

S02

SMC Smooth clear drive OFF

Smooth clear drive ON (default) %

%%

%

S01

S02

SQM Panel sequence mode: VIDEO sequence

Panel sequence mode: PC sequence

%

%

S03 Panel sequence mode: FILM sequence %

S01

S02

SSM SSCG OFF

SSCG ON %

%%

%

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

S08 STREAKING correction mode 8 %% Mod

Mod

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Main

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

THS Theater port interlock operation OFF

Theater port interlock operation ON

T

%

%



mode

ActiveU-com Last

MemoryRemarks

MDU MTB

S

%






It is necessary to wait for one minute after drive OFF

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD154

1 2 3 4



mode

ActiveU-com Last

MemoryRemarks

MDU MTB

V

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%%

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod∗∗∗

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

∗∗∗

S00

S01

VRP ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vyprst voltage Vyprst ADJUSTMENT

∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vsus voltage Vsus ADJUSTMENTVSU

%%∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vxpofs1 voltage Vxpofs1 ADJUSTMENTVX1

Mod %%∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vxpofs2 voltage Vxpofs2 ADJUSTMENTVX2

Mod %%∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofs1, 2 voltage Vyknofs1,2 ADJUSTMENTVY1

Mod %%∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofs3 voltage Vyknofs3 ADJUSTMENTVY3

Mod %%∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofs4 voltage Vyknofs4 ADJUSTMENTVY4

WBI Panel WB standard output mode: OFF

XSB

Y1K

Panel WB standard output mode: ON

2SF-repeat XSUS (resonance up width)

1SF-YSUS-Tail (wedge width)

1SF-YSUS-Tail (resonance down width)

2SF-second YSUS (resonance up width)

2SF-repeat YSUS (resonance up width)

Y1Z

Y2B

%% Mod∗∗∗ 2SF-YSUS-Tail (wedge width)Y2K

%% Mod∗∗∗ 2SF-YSUS-Tail (resonance down width)Y2Z

%% Mod∗∗∗ 3SF and later (SSF 2 pulses)-YSUS Tail (wedge width)YNK

%% Mod∗∗∗ 3SF and later (SSF 2 pulses)-YSUS Tail (resonance down width)YNZ

%% Mod∗∗∗ 3SF and later-YSUS Tail (wedge width)YTK

%% Mod∗∗∗ 3SF and later-YSUS Tail (resonance down width)YTZ

YSB

ZME

ZPR

Initializing the video EEPROM data

Initializing the setting data to which no adjustment command is providedPANEL EEPROM REFLESH

W

X

Y

Z

%% Mod∗∗∗X3B 2SF-third XSUS (resonance up width)

%% Mod∗∗∗X1B 3SF and later-first XSUS (resonance up width)

VFQ S01 Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-48 Hz

S02 Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-50 Hz

S03

S05

S06

S13

S23

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-60 Hz


Setting the frequency in Mask mode to PC-60 Hz

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-50 Hz (nonstandard)


S22


%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

S26

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-72 Hz (nonstandard)S25


%

%

%%

%

%

%

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

Mod

∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vysnofs voltage Vysnofs ADJUSTMENTVOF

VOLUP∗,DW∗,∗∗∗

To adjust the volume (to be used in combination with UP∗/DW∗)






















1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

155

5 6 7 8

9.3 DETAILS OF EACH COMMANDS9.3.1 QS1 (PANEL STATUS)

Model information and version information are returned.

Command Format

Effective Operation Modes Function Remarks

[QS1] Every Time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 84 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 89 Byte

2: Panel Generation

6 G6

7 G7

8 G8

9 G9

0 G10

3: Destination

∗ Commonness

A US (Reserved)

E EU (Reserved)

J Japan (Reserved)

4: Grade

∗ Commonness

Z Evaluation

Data ArrangementData

Length Output Example

ECO 3 byte QS1 (Fixed)

1 Resolution/Size 1 byte F

2 Panel Generation 1 byte 8

3 Destination 1 byte ∗

4 Grade 1 byte ∗

5 Panel Product Form 1 byte B

6 Boot version of Module microcomputer 3 byte 05F

7 Program version of Module microcomputer 8 byte -02F

8 Boot version of SQ_LSI 3 byte 04F

9 Program version of SQ_LSI 8 byte -01Y

10 Panel information 8 byte G8_50F

8

A

H

B

010AE

01A

-01A

01A

-01A

01A

FF

11

14

15

Reserved (panel section) 8 byte ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

16

, (comma) 1 byte

17

MTB generation 1 byte

,

18

MTB destination 1 byte

19

MTB grade 1 byte

20

MTB product form 1 byte

21

Program version of IF microcomputer 8 byte

22

Boot version of IF microcomputer 4 byte

Program version of Main microcomputer 8 byte

23

Boot version of Main microcomputer 4 byte

24

Program version of ASIC 8 byte

25

Boot version of ASIC 4 byte

CS (Check Sum) 2 byte

5: Panel Product Form

S System model

B All-in-one design TV

M Monitor

D Standard module

E Simple module

15: MTB Generation

6 G6

7 G7

8 G8

9 G9

0 G10

16: MTB Destination

A North America

C China

E Europe

G General

J Japan

U Australia

17: MTB Grade

H Elite/XDA/Step-upD

T Step-upA/XG/XC/Regular (US)

B Not used

18: MTB Product Form

S System model

B One body model

S RegularD

R RegularA

1: Resolution/Size

3 1024∗768/42

4 1024∗768/43

5 1280∗768/50

6 1365∗768/50

7 1365∗768/60

E 1920∗1080/42

F 1920∗1080/50

G 1920∗1080/60

10: Panel Information1 to 3rd byte G8_

42

50

60

∗

Generation information G8 + _(under bar) fixed

4 to 5th byte 42 inch

50 inch

60 inch

PSIZE information and SQ_LSI version mismatching (version mismatching at SD)

F

X

∗

_

6th byte FHD model

XGA model

Model information and SQ_LSI version mismatching (version mismatching at SD)

7th byte Under bar

6

4

∗

‘

8th byte 2nd PLANT (XGA 50 inch only)

1st PLANT (XGA 50 inch only)

PLANT information and SQ_LSI version mismatching (version mismatching at SD)

Others

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD156

1 2 3 4

9.3.2 QS2 (PANEL OPERATION DATA)

Data Arrangement Data Length Output Example

ECO 3 byte QS2 (fixed)

1 Power supply status 1 byte 0

2 Adjustment flag of the main unit 1 byte 0

3 Adjustment-data backup flag 1 byte 0

4 "1st PD" data 1 byte 0

5 "2nd PD" data 1 byte 0

6 Reserved 3 byte ∗∗

7 Temperature data (TEMP 1) 3 byte 063

8 SD main data 1 byte 0

9 SD sub data 1 byte 0

10 Operation status induced by SD 1 byte 0

11 Reserved 3 byte 0

12 HOUR METER 8 byte 00000437

13 MASK indication 1 byte 0

14 Still picture detection 1 byte 7C

15 SCAN protection detection 1 byte

16 Panel crack detection 1 byte

17 Address emergency detection 1 byte

18

19

Reserved 4 byte

CS 2 byte

1: Power supply status

0Entering Passive mode failed during standby

P During power ON

1Entering Passive mode succeededduring standby

2: Adjustment flag of the main unit

0 Adjustment completed

1 Adjustment not completed

3: Adjustment-data backup flag

0 With backup data

1 No backup data

4, 5: PD data

0 No PD data

1 Not used

2 POWER

3 SCAN

4 SCN-5V

5 Y-DRV

6 Y-DCDC

7 Y-SUS

8 ADRS

9 X-DRV

A X-DCDC

9-1: SD-Sub (SQ_LSI)

0 No SD-Sub data

1 Communication error

2 Drive stop

3 BUSY

4 Version mismatching (H/S)

B X-SUS

C DIG-DCDC

D Not used

E Not used

F UNKNOWN

8: SD main data

0 No SD

1 SQ_LSI communication error

2 MDU-IIC communication error

3 Abnormally in RST2

4 TEMP

10: Operation status induced by SD

0 Normal

1 Relay-off completed

2 During warning indication

13: MASK indication

0 MASK-OFF

1 MASK-ON

14 to 17: Detection of Each Protection function

0 Normal operation

1 At detection of protection operation

Command Format


[QS2] All operations To acquire data on operations of the panel Return data: 3 (ECO) + 34 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 39 Byte

The command QS2 is for acquiring data on the panel's operational information.

9-2: SD-Sub (MDU-IIC)

0 No SD-Sub data

1 EEPROM

2 BACKUP

3 DAC1

4 DAC2

9-3: SD-Sub (TEMP)

0 No SD-Sub data

1 TEMP1 high temperature

2 TEMP1 low temperature

5 Version mismatching (M/S)

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

157

5 6 7 8

9.3.3 QS3 (OTHER DATA ON THE PANEL)


ECO 3 byte QS3

1 SERIAL 15 byte - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2 HOUR METER 8 byte 00000000

3 BACKUP HR METER 8 byte 00000000

4 PON COUNTER 8 byte 00000000

5 TEMP1 acquisition (Temperature value) 5 byte +25.0 (*1)

6 TEMP0 acquisition (Temperature value) 5 byte +25.0 (*1)

7 MaxTEMP acquisition (Temperature value) 5 byte +75.0 (*1)

8

9

Reserved 4 byte ∗∗∗∗

CS 2 byte FB

Command Format


[QS3] All operations To acquire data on operations of the panel Return data: 3 (ECO) + 58 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 63 Byte

The command QS3 is for acquiring data on operational information of the panel.

Note (*1) : Centigrade scale

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD158

1 2 3 4

9.3.4 QAJ (PANEL ADJUSTMENT DATA)



ECO 3 byte QAJ

1 V-SUS adjustment value 3 byte 128

2 Vysnofs adjustment value 3 byte 128

3 Vyprst adjustment value 3 byte 128

4 Vxpofs1 adjustment value 3 byte 128

5 Vxpofs2 adjustment value 3 byte 128

6 Vyknofs1,2 adjustment value 3 byte 128

7 Vyknofs3 adjustment value 3 byte 128

11 Y1K adjustment value 3 byte 128

12 Y1Z adjustment value 3 byte 128

13 X1B adjustment value 3 byte 128

8 Vyknofs4 adjustment value 3 byte 128

9 R1K adjustment value 3 byte 128

10 R2K adjustment value 3 byte 128

14 Y2B adjustment value 3 byte 128

15 X3B adjustment value 3 byte 128

16 YSB adjustment value 3 byte 128

17 XSB adjustment value 3 byte 128

18 YTK adjustment value 3 byte 128

19 YTZ adjustment value 3 byte 128

20 Y2K adjustment value 3 byte 128

24 R-REVISE setting value 1 byte 0

25 G-REVISE setting value 1 byte 0

26 B-REVISE setting value 1 byte 0

21 Y2Z adjustment value 3 byte 128

22 YNK adjustment value 3 byte 128

23 YNZ adjustment value 3 byte 128

27 ADDRESS 1, 2 setting value 2 byte 01


31 Streaking correction 1 byte 1

32 AM radio countermeasure 1 byte 1



33

34

Reserved 2 byte ∗∗

CS 2 byte B7

Command Format


[QAJ] All operations To acquire data on the setting value of drive voltage Return data: 3 (ECO) + 84 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 89 Byte

The command QAJ is for acquiring the panel's factory-preset data.

31: Streaking correction

0 OFF

n n: 1 to 8 (Mode n)

32: AM radio countermeasure

n n: 1 to 8 (SUS frequency n)

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

159

5 6 7 8

9.3.5 QPW (VIDEO ADJUSTMENT DATA OF THE PANEL)

9.3.6 QPM (PULSE METER VALUE)

Data Arrangement Data Length

OutputExample

ECO 3 byte QPW (fixed)

1 Drive sequence 3 byte 60V

2 Standard/nonstandard 1 byte S

3 Type of ABL/WB tables 2 byte T1

4 ABL adjustment value 3 byte 128

5 R-HIGH adjustment value 3 byte 256

6 G-HIGH adjustment value 3 byte 256

7 B-HIGH adjustment value 3 byte 256

15 Center luminance correction 1 byte 1

16 Reserved 1 byte ∗

17 WB interlocked with APL 1 byte 0

18 Transition of protective operations 1 byte 0

19

20

Reserved 2 byte ∗∗

8 R-LOW adjustment value 3 byte 512

9 G-LOW adjustment value 3 byte 512

10 B-LOW adjustment value 3 byte 512

11 R gamma setting 2 byte 07

12 G gamma setting 2 byte 07

13 B gamma setting 2 byte 07

14 Streaking correction 1 byte 0

CS 2 byte 39

15: Center luminance correction

0 OFF

2 ON (interlocked with APL)

1 ON

3: Type of ABL/WB tables

n n: 1 to 4

11, 12, 13: RGB Gamma setting

n 00 to 31

18: Transition of brightness by protective operations

0 Upper limit state for brightness

1 Brightness being reduced

2 Lower limit state for brightness

3 Brightness being increased

17: WB interlocked with APL

0 OFF

1 ON

2 WB interlocked ON/γ OFF

3 WB interlocked OFF/γ ON

1: Drive sequence

50V Video 50 Hz

48V Video 48 Hz

60V Video 60 Hz

72V Video 72 Hz

75V Video 75 Hz

70P PC 70 Hz

60P PC 60 Hz

2: Standard/ nonstandard

S Standard

N Nonstandard

14: Streking correction

0 OFF

1 ON

Command Format


[QPW] All operations To acquire data on the video setting value Return data: 3 (ECO) + 40 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 45 Byte

The command QPW is for acquiring the factory-preset data about the video of the panel.


ECO 3 byte QPM (fixed)

1 Pulse meter B 1 8 byte 00000000




5

6

Pulse meter B 5 8 byte 00000000

CS 2 byte 6E

Command Format


[QPM] All operations To acquire data on the accumulated number of pulses Return data: 3 (ECO) + 40 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 45 Byte

The command QPM is for acquiring the accumulated number of pulses of the panel.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD160

1 2 3 4

9.3.7 QPD (PD LOGS)

Data Arrangement Data Length

Output Example

ECO 3 byte QPD (fixed)

1 Latest "1st PD" data 1 byte A

2 Latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 2

3 Data from the hour meter for the latest PD 8 byte 00010020

4 Second latest "1st PD" data 1 byte E

5 Second latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 9

6 Data from the hour meter for the second latest PD 8 byte 00008523

7 Third latest "1st PD" data 1 byte 4

8 Third latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 3

9 Data from the hour meter for the third latest PD 8 byte 00004335

10 Fourth latest "1st PD" data 1 byte 2

11 Fourth latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 0

12 Data from the hour meter for the fourth latest PD 8 byte 00000945

13 Fifth latest "1st PD" data 1 byte 4

14 Fifth latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 0

15 Data from the hour meter for the fifth latest PD 8 byte 00000715

16 Sixth latest "1st PD" data 1 byte A

17 Sixth latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 2

18 Data from the hour meter for the sixth latest PD 8 byte 00000552

19 Seventh latest "1st PD" data 1 byte A

20 Seventh latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 0

21 Data from the hour meter for the seventh latest PD 8 byte 00000213

22 Eighth latest "1st PD" data 1 byte D

23 Eighth latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 0

24

25

Data from the hour meter for the eighth latest PD 8 byte 00000123

CS 2 byte 27

1, 2, 4, 5: PD data

0 No PD

1 Not used

2 P-POWER

3 SCAN

4 SCN-5V

5 Y-DRIVE

6 Y-DCDC

7 Y-SUS

8 Address

9 X-DRIVE

A X-DCDC

B X-SUS

C DIGITAL-DC/DC

D Not used

E Not used

F UNKNOWN

Command Format


[QPD] All operations To acquire data on the power-down logs Return data: 3 (ECO) + 80 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 85 Byte

The command QPD is for acquiring data from the 8 latest power-down (PD) logs.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

161

5 6 7 8

9.3.8 QSD (SD LOGS)



ECO 3 byte QSD (fixed)

1 Latest SD data 1 byte 1

2 Latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0

3 Data from the hour meter for the latest SD 8 byte 00752013

4 Second latest SD data 1 byte 5

5 Second latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0

6 Data from the hour meter for the second latest SD 8 byte 00456378

7 Third latest SD data 1 byte 2

8 Third latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 3

9 Data from the hour meter for the third latest SD 8 byte 00347845

10 Fourth latest SD data 1 byte 2

11 Fourth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 4

12 Data from the hour meter for the fourth latest SD 8 byte 00175635

13 Fifth latest SD data 1 byte 1

14 Fifth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0

15 Data from the hour meter for the fifth latest SD 8 byte 00083450

16 Sixth latest SD data 1 byte 2

17 Sixth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 2

18 Data from the hour meter for the sixth latest SD 8 byte 00045662

19 Seventh latest SD data 1 byte 0

20 Seventh latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0

21 Data from the hour meter for the seventh latest SD 8 byte 00000000

22 Eighth latest SD data 1 byte 0

23 Eighth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0

24

25

Data from the hour meter for the eighth latest SD 8 byte 00000000

CS 2 Byte 7D

Command Format


[QSD] All operations To acquire data on the shutdown logs Return data: 3 (ECO) + 80 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 85 Byte

The command QSD is for acquiring the data from the 8 latest shutdown (SD) logs.

" SD data (Main)

0 No SD (Main)

1 SQ_LSI communication error

2 MDU-IIC communication error

3 Abnormally in RST2

4 TEMP

" SD subcategory (SQ_LSI)

0 No SD-Sub data

1 Communication error

2 Drive stop

4 Version mismatching (H/S)

3 BUSY

" SD subcategory (Main: MDU-IIC)

0 No SD-Sub data

1 Main-EEPROM

2 Backup-EEPROM

3 DAC1

4 DAC2

" SD subcategory (Main: TEMP)

0 No SD-Sub data

1 TEMP1 (high temperature)

2 TEMP1 (low temperature)

5 Version mismatching (M/S)

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD162

1 2 3 4

9.3.9 QSE (DESTINATION PECULIAR INFORMATION)

9.3.10 QMT (TEMPERATURE / FAN ROTATION / ROOM LIGHT SENSOR)

Data ArrangementPartOrderData

LengthOutput

Example

Received Command name 3 byte QSE

07080200

16777215

= 00K.22p

07.00d

2.4.2527

04.13d

Y

∗

N

Y

N

N

1.0.126

1234

13

1

0 −

DTV Hardware Version 8 byte

2 DTV Hardware Serial 8 byte

3 DTV RUNTIME Version 8 byte

4 CFE Version 8 byte

5 KERNEL Version 8 byte

6 ROOTS Version 8 byte

7 FLAGS Information 1 1 byte






13

−

HMG/HG Model Version 10 byte

14 User Password 4 byte

15 Check Sum 2 byte

Command Format


[QSE] Every time Output of status

Induce it peculiar, individual information is acquired.

Data ArrangementPartOrderData


Received Command name 3 byte QMT

267

1

009

5

1

0 −

MTB A/D value of MTB-side Temperature 3 byte

2 MTB-side FAN rotating speed (0: STOP, 1: LOW, 2: HIGH) 1 byte

3 A/D value of room light sensor 3 byte

4 Level of room light sensor (Value: 1 to 5) 1 byte

Command Format


[QMT] Every time Output of status A/D value of MTB-side's temperature/FAN rotating status

Temperature information / FAN rotation state / Room light sensor information on the MTB side is returned.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

163

5 6 7 8

9.3.11 QNG (SHUTDOWN INFORMATION OF MTB)

Command Format


[QNG] Every time Output of status

MTB side's shutdown information is acquired.

∗: Indicates the frequency of Blue LED flashing when the shutdown is occurred.

< SD Information No. >

Order Part Data Arrangement Data Length

Output Example

0 − Received Command name 3 byte QNG

0

0

0

0

0000000

0

0

0000000

0

0

00

0000000

0000000

fixed on 000

fixed on 000

fixed on 000

fixed on 000

1 MTB 1st latest NG No. 1 byte

2 Subcategory No. for the 1st latest NG. 1 byte

3 MTB hour meter for the 1st latest NG. 7 byte

4 Reserved 3 byte

5 2nd latest NG No. 1 byte

6 Subcategory No. for the 2nd latest NG. 1 byte

7 MTB hour meter for the 2nd latest NG. 7 byte

8 Reserved 3 byte

9 3rd latest NG No. 1 byte

10 Subcategory No. for the 3rd latest NG. 1 byte

11 MTB hour meter for the 3rd latest NG. 7 byte

12 Reserved 3 byte

: : :

29 8th latest NG No. 1 byte

30 Subcategory No. for the 8th latest NG. 1 byte

31 MTB hour meter for the 8th latest NG. 7 byte

32 Reserved 3 byte

33 − Check Sum 2 byte

Frequency * Part Part Remarks (Operation)

MTBpart

Immediately Shutdown

Immediately Shutdown

5Shutdown signal from audio amp. / short-circuit of speaker terminal

Shutdown after 30 seconds warning

6 Failure of communication with Module microcomputer

7 3-wire serial communication of Main microcomputer Go to No. 7 Subcategory Information

8 IIC communication failure of MTB side Go to No. 8 Subcategory Information

10(A) Failure of FAN Go to No. 10 Subcategory Information

11(B) Abnormally in high temperature Shutdown after 30 seconds warning

12(C) Failure of Digital Tuner Go to No. 12 Subcategory Information

13(D) Failure of Power Supply at MTB side Go to No. 13 Subcategory Information

14(E) Startup failure of Home Media Gallery -

15(F) Failure of Main EEPROM Immediately Shutdown

9 Communication failure of Main microcomputer

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD164

1 2 3 4

< No. 8 Subcategory Information on "Failure in IIC communication of MTB side" >

Value Shutdown Factor Remarks (Operation)

1 Tuner 1

2 MSP/MAP Shutdown

Shutdown

3 AV Switch Shutdown

4 RGB Switch Shutdown

5 VDEC Shutdown

6 VDEC-SDRAM Shutdown

7 AD/PLL Shutdown

8 HDMI Shutdown

A Tuner 2 Shutdown

B US-MSP Shutdown

< No. 7 Subcategory Information on "Failure in 3-wire serial communication of Main microcomputer" >

Value Shutdown Factor Remarks (Operation)

1Communication error of IF microcomputer Shutdown

2Communication error of sequence processor

Shutdown

< No. 10 Subcategory Information on "Abnormally in FAN" >

Value Shutdown Factor Remarks (Operation)1 FAN 1 Shutdown

2 FAN 2 (FHD only) Shutdown

< No. 12 Subcategory Information on "Failure in Digital Tuner" >

Value Shutdown Factor Remarks (Operation)1 DTV starting failure Turn off the screen,

then reset the device.

2 DTV communication error

4 Abnormmaly in BCM7038

7 Tuner 1 or 2

8 Card I/F IC

9 VBI Slicer

C EEPROM

E TV Guide

G Home Gallery

H Middleware

I Application

< No. 13 Subcategory Information on "Failure in Power supply at MTB side" >

Value Shutdown Factor Remarks (Operation)1 RST 2 Shutdown

2 RST 4 Shutdown

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

165

5 6 7 8

9.3.12 QSI (INPUT SIGNAL DATA)

9.3.13 DRV (PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF)


LengthOutput

Example

ECO 3 Byte QSI (fixed)

1 Type of drive sequence 3 Byte 60V

2 Standard/nonstandard 1 Byte S

3 Type of ABL/WB tables 2 Byte T1

4 Total value of PCN 4 Byte 0256

5 Total value of PRH 4 Byte 0256

6 Total value of PGH 4 Byte 0256

7 Total value of PBH 4 Byte 0256

8 Total value of PBR 4 Byte 0512

9 Total value of PRL 4 Byte 0512

10 Total value of PGL 4 Byte 0512

11 Total value of PBL 4 Byte 0512

12 Total value of ABL 3 Byte 128

13 V frequency distinction 4 Byte 6002

14 Reserved 1 Byte ∗

15 Reserved 4 Byte ∗∗∗∗

16 APL acquiring data 4 Byte 1023

17 Number of SUS pulses 4 Byte 0457

18 Result of detection of still picture 1 Byte 1

19 Result of detection of cracking in the panel 1 Byte 1

20 Result of detection for scanning protection 1 Byte 1

21 Result of detection for external protection 1 Byte 1

22 Transition of protection operation 1 Byte 1

23

24

Reserved 4 Byte ∗∗∗∗

CS 2 Byte 27

Command Format


[QSI] All operations To acquire all data on input video signals Return data: 3 (ECO) + 66 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 71 Byte

The command QSI is for acquiring all data on input video signals.

18 to 21: Each protection function

0 Setting: OFF

2 Setting: ON (during operation)

1 Setting: ON (during wait)

22: Transition of protection operations

0 Upper limit state for brightness

1 Brightness being reduced

2 Lower limit state for brightness

3 Brightness being increased

1: Type of Drive sequence

50V Video 50 Hz

60V Video 60 Hz

72V Video 72 Hz

75V Video 75 Hz

70P PC 70 Hz

60P PC 60 Hz

2: Standard/ nonstandard

S Standard

N Nonstandard

3: Type of ABL/WB tables

Tn n: 1 to 4

13: V frequency distinctionReading value *100

16: APL acquiring dataOutput with 10 bit 0 to 1023

17: Number of SUS pulses0174 to 2752

Command Format


[DRV+S00] Every time DRIVE OFF

[DRV+S01] Every time DRIVE ON (default)

Drive ON/OFF: ON/OFF control of panel drive-power system

Once the DRIVE OFF command is accepted, DRIVE OFF cannot be canceled by pressing the DRIVE OFF key again or by turning the unit off then back on with the STANDBY OFF/ON key.To cancel DRIVE OFF, restart the unit by unplugging then again plugging in the power cord.

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD166

1 2 3 4

9.3.14 FAY / FAN (ADJ. COMMANDS PERMISSION / PROHIBITION)

9.3.15 FAJ / UAJ / CBU / BCP (BACKUP FUNCTION FOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE)

The commands FAY/FAN are for prohibiting/permitting panel/MTB-adjustment commands.

Command Format

OperationRemarksEffective Operation

ModesControl

[FAY] Normal operation mode while the power is on

Adjustment command is valid.For details, refer to the section “6.1.3 FUNCTIONS WHEN ENTERING THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE”.

[FAN] During FAY Adjustment command is invalid.

Command Format

OperationRemarksEffective

Operation ModesControl

[FAJ]

During FAY

To make the flag setting that indicating that adjustment of the panel unit has been completed

This takes at least 350 mS.

[UAJ] To make the flag setting that indicating that adjustment of the main unit has not been completed

[CBU] To make the flag setting that indicating that backup data have not been copied

The backup ROM is initialized.

[BCP] To copy Digital backup data to EEPROM

When the DIGITAL Assy is to be replaced, adjustment values can be copied from the backup EEPROM to the EEPROM of the Assy for service.

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

167

5 6 7 8

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD168

1 2 3 4

10. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST

10.1 PACKING SECTION

Parts marked by "NSP" are generally unavailable because they are not in our Master Spare Parts List.The mark found on some component parts indicates the importance of the safety factor of the part.Therefore, when replacing, be sure to use parts of identical designation.Screws adjacent to mark on product are used for disassembly. For the applying amount of lubricants or glue, follow the instructions in this manual.(In the case of no amount instructions, apply as you think it appropriate.)

NOTES:

Speed clamp ×3

Bead band ×3

Screw ×2

Plastic Band ×2

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

169

5 6 7 8

(1) PACKING SECTION PARTS LIST

(2) CONTRAST TABLEPDP-5010FD/KUCXC and KUC are constructed the same except for the following:


> 1 Power Cord (2 m) ADG1215

2 Remote Control Unit AXD1550

3 Battery Cover AZN2680

NSP 4 Alkaline Dry Cell Battery (LR6, AA) VEM1023

5 Binder Assy AEC1908

6 Cleaning Cloth AED1285

7 Operating Instructions See Contrast table (2)

(English, French, Spanish)

8 Caution Card See Contrast table (2)

9 Cleaning Caution (U) See Contrast table (2)

10 Accessory Caution See Contrast table (2)

NSP 11 Warranty Card See Contrast table (2)

NSP 12 Card (Register) See Contrast table (2)

13 Polyethylene Bag See Contrast table (2)

14 Power Button Caution See Contrast table (2)

15 After Image Caution See Contrast table (2)

16 Pad (508F-REG B-L) AHA2632

17 Pad (508F-REG B-R) AHA2633

18 Pad (508F-REG T-L) AHA2634

19 Pad (508F-REG T-R) AHA2635

20 Pad (508F-REG ACC) AHA2675

21 Under Carton See Contrast table (2)

22 Upper Carton (5010FD) See Contrast table (2)

23 Packing Sheet L See Contrast table (2)

24 Band Assy AXY1192

25 Speaket System SMW1985

26 HDMI Caution See Contrast table (2)

27 • • • • •

28 Parental Caution See Contrast table (2)


Mark No. Symbol and Description PDP-5010FD/KUCXC

PDP-5010FD/KUC

7 Operating Instructions (English, French, Spanish) ARE1472 ARE1487

8 Caution Card ARM1239 ARM1232

9 Cleaning Caution (U) ARM1303 ARM1283

10 Accessory Caution ARM1304 ARM1362

NSP 11 Warranty Card ARY1196 ARY1138

NSP 12 Card (Register) ARY1156 VRY1132

13 Polyethylene Bag AHG1394 Not used

NSP 13 Vinyl Bag Not used AHG1340

14 Power Button Caution ARM1360 ARM1363

15 After Image Caution ARM1351 ARM1361

21 Under Carton (508) AHD3588 Not used

21 Under Carton (5010FD) Not used AHD3571

22 Upper Carton (5010FD) AHD3624 AHD3623

23 Packing Sheet L AHG1389 Not used

23 Packing Sheet Not used AHG1405

26 HDMI Caution ARM1373 ARM1374

28 Parental Caution ARM1371 ARM1372

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD170

1 2 3 4

10.2 REAR SECTION

B

B

A

A

TANSHICN8801 CN8802

MAINCN4110 (USB)

C

C

MAINCN4109

Refer to"10.3 FRONT SECTION".

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

171

5 6 7 8

(1) REAR SECTION PARTS LIST



1 SIDE IO Assy AWW1274

2 SIDE KEY Assy AWW1275

3 USB Cable (J301) ADF1034

4 Side Input Panel (8U) ANC2457

5 Function Button Base See Contrast table (2)

6 Side Input Shield See Contrast table (2)

7 Function Button Shield See Contrast table (2)

8 Coil Spring ABH1125

9 Spacer AEC1288

10 PCB Spacer AEC1570

11 Reuse Wire Saddle AEC1945

12 Locking Card Spacer AEC2019


14 USB Spacer A AED1317

15 Inner Grip Assy See Contrast table (2)

> 16 Gasket (J-TYPE) ANK1956

NSP 17 Name Label See Contrast table (2)

NSP 18 Serial Seal See Contrast table (2)

19 Caution Label See Contrast table (2)

20 Label A (U) AAX3478

21 Label C (U) AAX3501

22 Label B50 (U) AAX3540

23 Terminal Panel B (50U) ANC2452

24 Power Button Case (508F) AAK2908

25 Function Button Panel AMB2906

26 Side Input Cover AMB2911

27 Function Button AAC1562

28 Power Button (508F) AAD4152

29 Function Button Sheet (8U) AAK2919

30 Input Cover Label 8U AAX3509

31 Rear Case (508F) ANE1662

32 Cushion AEB1489

33 • • • • •

34 Screw (3 x 40P) ABA1332

35 Screw ABA1341

36 Screw AMZ30P060FTB

37 Screw AMZ30P080FTC

38 Screw APZ30P080FTB

39 Screw BPZ30P080FTB

40 Screw TBZ40P080FTB

41 Screw BBZ30P060FTB




PDP-5010FD/KUC

5 Function Button Base ANG3066 ANG2923

6 Side Input Shield ANK1938 ANK1834

7 Function Button Shield ANK1939 ANK1835

15 Inner Grip Assy AMR3693 AMR3434

NSP 17 Name Label (508REG) AAL2934 Not used

NSP 17 Name Label (508REG-J) Not used AAL2997

NSP 18 Serial Seal AAX3182 Not used

18 Serial Sheet Not used AAX3143

19 Caution Label U AAX3534 Not used

19 Caution Label E Not used AAX3533

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD172

1 2 3 4

10.3 FRONT SECTION

MAINCN4107

MAINCN4109

Rear view

Refer to"10.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2)".

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

173

5 6 7 8

FRONT SECTION PARTS LIST


1 FHD IR Assy AWW1289

2 50FHD LED Assy AWW1291

3 FHD RLS Assy AWW1292

4 6P/6P/3P Housing Wire (J117) ADX3562

5 Blind Cushion (508F) AEB1479

6 Nylon Rivet AEC1671

7 Rivet AEC1877

8 1..Front Case Assy (508FU) AMB3001

NSP 9 2..Panel Cushion H (50) AED1257

NSP 10 2..Panel Cushion V (50) AED1258

11 • • • • •

12 FC Gate Sheet AMR3746

13 Screw ABZ30P080FTC

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD174

1 2 3 4

10.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2)

FHD FANCONNECT

CN9553

MAINCN4103

POWERSUPPLY

P10

FHD FANCONNECT

CN9555

FHD FANCONNECT

CN9554

Cleaning liquid : GEM1004Cleaning paper : GED-008

Refer to"10.7 MULTI BASE SECTION".

Refer to"10.5 CHASSIS SECTION (2/2)".

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

175

5 6 7 8

(1) CHASSIS SECTION (1/2) PARTS LIST



1 FHD POWER SW Assy AWW1293

2 Ferrite Core (L1) ATX1044

3 Housing Wire (J103) ADX3552

> 4 Fan Motor 80 x 25L AXM1058

> 5 DC Fan Motor 80 x 25L AXM1064

6 Front Chassis VL (508F) AMA1027

7 Front Chassis VR (508F) AMA1028

8 Sub Frame L Assy 507 See Contrast table (2)

9 Sub Frame R Assy 507 See Contrast table (2)

10 Front Chassis HT (508F) Assy ANA2092

11 Front Chassis HB Assy (50) ANA2094

12 Panel Holder V1 (50) ANG2770

13 Panel Holder V2 (50) ANG2771

14 Fan Holder ANG2833

15 Multi Base Holder ANG2937

16 Sub Frame Plate ANG3046

17 Floating Rubber 80 AEB1427

18 Ferrite Core Holder AEC1818


20 Ferrite Clamp AEC1986


22 Fan Holder AMR3704

23 Gasket ADH-FCH ANK1850

24 • • • • •

25 • • • • •

26 Screw See Contrast table (2)




30 Screw PPZ50P100FTB


32 Screw ABA1364



PDP-5010FD/KUC

8 Sub Frame L Assy 507 ANA2080 ANA1945

9 Sub Frame R Assy 507 ANA2081 ANA1946

26 Screw ABA1313 ABA1351

PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD176

1 2 3 4

10.5 CHASSIS SECTION (2/2)

I

Q

R

S

O

ST

V

V

D

C

B

A

X

J

H

I

G

FW

E

Y

Y

J

LK

LK

M

N

A

B

O

P D

C

NM

U

U X

QR

E

P

F

T

G

H

W

MAINCN4101

MAINCN4105

MAINCN4106 TANSHI

CN8806

FHDPOWER SW

CN9571

AC Inlet

MAINCN4113 Fan×3

Refer to"10.6 PANEL CHASSIS SECTION".

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

177

5 6 7 8

(1) CHASSIS SECTION (2/2) PARTS LIST



1 50F X DRIVE Assy AWV2510

2 50F Y DRIVE Assy AWV2511

3 PANEL SENSOR Assy AWW1309

4 50F DIGITAL Assy AWW1316

5 FHD FAN CONNECT Assy AWW1290

> 6 POWER SUPPLY Unit AXY1168

7 Ferrite Core (F1 - F8) ATX1048

8 Three Pieces Connector 40P AKM1384

9 Flexible Cable (J201) ADD1498











20 5P Housing Wire (J105) ADX3359

21 Housing Wire (J126) ADX3545

22 9P&7P Housing Wire (J101) ADX3550







29 3P&3P&3P Housing Wire (J123)ADX3565

30 Conductive Plate Y ANG3050

31 Nylon Rivet AEC1671

32 Wire Saddle AEC1745

33 Flat Clamp AEC1879


35 Side Type Mini Clamp AEC2003

36 PCB Spacer (Reuse) AEC2087


38 Reuse HL 28 AEC2119


40 Drive Silicone AEH1139

41 Drive Sheet A AMR3697

42 Drive Sheet B AMR3698

43 • • • • •

44 • • • • •


46 Screw ABA1364



PDP-5010FD/KUC


PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD178

1 2 3 4

10.6 PANEL CHASSIS SECTION

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

179

5 6 7 8

(1) PANEL CHASSIS SECTION PARTS LIST



NSP 1 Panel Chassis (F) Assy AWU1234

NSP 2 50F ADDRESS L Assy AWW1310

NSP 3 50F ADDRESS S Assy AWW1311

NSP 4 50F SCAN A Assy AWW1312

NSP 5 50F SCAN B Assy AWW1313

NSP 6 50F SCAN C Assy AWW1314

NSP 7 50F SCAN D Assy AWW1315

NSP 8 Plasma Panel (50F) Assy AWU1235



11 Heat Radiation Sheet AEH1134

12 Conductive Plate Holder AMR3446

13 Address Plate (50F) A ANG3048

14 Address Plate (50F) B ANG3071

15 Conductive Plate X (F) ANG2906

16 Screw ABA1351

17 Screw ABA1364

18 Three Pieces Connector 40P AKM1384

19 Gasket AD ANK1948



PDP-5010FD/KUC


PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD180

1 2 3 4

10.7 MULTI BASE SECTION

A

B

B

DUSB(side)

Fan FHD FANCONNECTCN9551

P9P8

POWER

50F DIGITAL CN3201

SIDE KEY CN9501FHD IR CN9731

FHD RLS CN9781

50FHD LED CN9671

POWERP3

SIDE IOCN9352

SIDE IOCN9351

E

DE

F

F

C

C

POWERP5

A

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

181

5 6 7 8

MULTI BASE SECTION PARTS LIST


> 1 MAIN Assy AWV2457

2 TANSHI Assy AWW1334

3 POD Assy AWW1295

> 4 Power Switch (S1 : TRAP) ASG1089

> 5 AC Inlet (CN1) AKP1322



8 Flexible Cable (J214, J215) ADD1519



11 11/6/4P Housing Wire (J114) ADX3560

12 • • • • •


14 8P/4P Housing Wire (J119) ADX3531



17 • • • • •

18 Locking Card Spacer AEC1429

19 Wire Saddle AEC1745


21 Silicone Sheet Audio AEH1143

22 POD Cover AMR3542

23 Multi Base Assy (U) ANA2102

24 Terminal Panel A (U) ANC2440

25 POD Stay A ANG2933

26 • • • • •

27 Gasket UD ANK1883

28 Hex. Head Screw BBA1051

29 Washer Faced Nut BBN1005

30 Screw BMZ30P060FTB

31 Screw PMB30P080FNI



PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD182

1 2 3 4

10.8 PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F (AWU1272)

Exterior Section

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

183

5 6 7 8

PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F PARTS LIST

Refer to the “• Exterior Section” for the mounting position.

Packing Section


NSP 1 Panel Chassis (F) Assy AWU1234

2 Front Chassis VL (508F) AMA1027

3 Front Chassis VR (508F) AMA1028

4 Sub Frame L Assy 507 ANA1945

5 Sub Frame R Assy 507 ANA1946

6 Front Chassis HT (508F) Assy ANA2092

7 Front Chassis HB Assy (50) ANA2094

8 Conductive Plate X (F) ANG2906

9 Sub Frame Plate ANG3046

10 Address Plate (50F) A ANG3048

11 Address Plate (50F) B ANG3071

12 Rivet AEC1877


14 Side Type Mini Clamp AEC2003


16 Gasket ADH-FCH ANK1850

17 Gasket AD ANK1948

NSP 18 Front Case (508F) AMB3000

19 Rear Case (508F) ANE1662

NSP 20 Drive Voltage Label ARW1097

21 Screw (3 x 40P) ABA1332

22 Screw ABA1351

23 Screw ABA1364





28 • • • • •

29 • • • • •

30 • • • • •

31 Caution Label AAX3031

32 Vinyl Bag S AHG1338

33 • • • • •

34 Service Pad AEC2105

35 Pad (508F T-L) AHA2683

36 Pad (508F T-R) AHA2684

37 Pad (508F B-L) AHA2685

38 Pad (508F B-R) AHA2686

39 Under Carton (508F) AHD3622

40 Upper Carton (508F service) AHD3637

41 Protect Sheet AHG1331


PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD184

1 2 3 4

10.9 TABLE TOP STAND

TABLE TOP STAND PARTS LIST

Front

RearBottom view


1 Base Cover Assy AXY1176

2 Stand Pipe L Assy AXY1182

3 Stand Pipe R Assy AXY1183

4 Screw ABA1357

5 Screw (M8 x 23) ABA1371

6 Screw (M8 x 40) ABA1373

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

185

5 6 7 8

10.10 SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING)

SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING) PARTS LIST

Up

×2


NSP 1 1..Accessory Set SME3775

2 2..Speaker Wire SDS1202

3 2..Polyethylene Bag S1 SHL1439

NSP 4 2..Screw Set SME3696

5 3..Screw BMZ50P100FTB

6 3..Polyethylene Bag S0 SHL1438

7 1..Bracket Assy (S) SXG1127

8 2..Gasket SED1136

9 2..Gasket SED1138

10 2..Gasket SED1166

NSP 11 2..Bracket LR SNA1481

12 1..Bracket Assy (C) SXG1128




NSP 16 2..Bracket C SNA1482

17 • • • • •

18 Protector (Side) SHA2577

19 Protector (C-T) SHA2578

20 Protector (C-M) SHA2579

21 Protector (C-B) SHA2580

22 Protection Sheet S3 SHC1846

23 Protection Sheet S1 SHC1847

24 Packing Case SHG2780

25 Packing Bag S2 SHL1450

26 Polyethylen Bag S0 SHL1451

NSP 27 CS Assy SMW1987

NSP 28 Serial Label SRW1112


PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

C

D

F

A

B

E

PDP-5010FD186

1 2 3 4

10.11 CS ASSY

Baf

fle (

back

)G

rille

(ba

ck)

Baf

fle (

Fron

t)G

rille

(Fr

ont)

Cab

inet

(in

side

)(T

op)

(Top

)

(Top

)

Sec

tion:

A

Rea

r

(Top

)

Tweeter

Input Terminal

Input Terminal

TW

WF

TW

WF

TW

WF

TW

WF

WF

TW TW

FW

1 2 3 4

C

D

F

A

B

E

187

5 6 7 8

CS ASSY PARTS LIST


1 Speaker H132DC65-51D

2 Speaker FK26AP32-55H

NSP 3 Baffle SNK2980

NSP 4 Cabinet Assy C SXG1122

NSP 5 Cabinet Assy L SXG1123

NSP 6 Cabinet Assy R SXG1124

7 Grille SMG1886

8 1..Network Assy SWN1787

2..Capacitor 1.5 SCE1034

2..Choke Coil 0.68 STH1266

NSP 9 Gasket SEB1299


11 Packing SEB1302

NSP 12 Blinder SEB1304



NSP 15 Gasket SEC2074

16 Gasket SEC2076


18 Gasket SEC2083







NSP 25 Felt SED1127

NSP 26 Felt SED1130

27 Tape SEH1089

28 Tape SEH1099

29 Tape SEH1117

30 Input Terminal SKX1098

NSP 31 MDF Bar SLX1165

NSP 32 Paper Tube 26 SMR1403

NSP 33 Acoustic Absorbent SMT1331







NSP 40 Model Label SAN3955

NSP 41 Caution Label SRR1024

NSP 42 Serial Label SRW1111

43 • • • • •

44 Screw BPZ30P080FTC







PDP-5010FD5 6 7 8

Documents

Pioneer 6289628 Pdp 5010fd Svm